JP2020203215A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with increased interest.SOLUTION: A game machine that can perform variable display and control a game state to an advantageous state includes: corresponding display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to a variable display by any of the multiple stages of display modes with different expectations; specific notice performance execution means for executing a specific notice performance that continuously gives notice that the corresponding display by a specific display is changed to be in a display mode with higher expectation for a predetermined period; and suggestion performance execution means for executing a suggestion performance suggesting that a holding display may be changed to be in a display mode with higher expectation. The degree of expectation of the specific notice performance differs depending on the type and number of specific displays. The suggestion performance execution means executes the suggestion performance at a higher rate when the specific notice performance is executed than when the specific notice performance is not executed. The suggestion performance can be executed even when the specific notice performance is not executed. After the specific notice performance is executed, the corresponding display is changed to a stage with higher expectations by acting the specific display on the corresponding display.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 27

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

In a game machine capable of performing a look-ahead effect of foretelling by changing the hold display or the like corresponding to the variable display to a display mode other than the normal mode, the display mode of the hold display of the notice target is changed to a special mode. A gaming machine has been proposed that changes to a display mode in which the expectation is one step higher at each shift timing (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-61580

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, when the display mode of the hold display is changed to the special mode, the stage of the final change can be known from the remaining number of shifts. The production became monotonous, and the improvement of the interest was insufficient.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine with improved interest.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
It is equipped with a corresponding display means that can display a corresponding display corresponding to a variable display by any of multiple display modes having different expectations.
The corresponding display means
Hold display means that can display hold display corresponding to variable display before execution as corresponding display,
Including an active display means capable of displaying an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed as a corresponding display,
A specific notice effect execution means for executing a specific notice effect that continuously announces that the corresponding display will change to a display mode at a higher expectation stage by a specific display different from the corresponding display for a predetermined period.
Further provided with a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the hold display may change to a display mode at a higher expectation stage.
There are multiple types of the specific display.
The specific advance notice effect executing means can execute the specific advance notice effect by a plurality of the specific displays.
The degree of expectation of the specific notice effect differs depending on the type of the specific display and the number of the specific displays.
When the specific advance notice effect is executed, the suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the specific advance notice effect is not executed, and the specific advance notice effect is not executed. Sometimes the above-mentioned suggestion effect can be executed,
After the execution of the specific notice effect, the specific display acts on the corresponding display, so that the corresponding display changes to a stage with a higher degree of expectation.
(1) In order to achieve the above objectives, game machines related to other aspects are
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Corresponding display means (for example, 1st hold display part 5HL, 2nd hold display part 5HR, active display part AHA) capable of displaying the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display by any of a plurality of stages of display modes having different expectations.
An effect control that executes the processing of steps S604, S606, and S702 to execute the notification effect that continuously notifies that the corresponding display changes to the display mode at a higher expectation stage for a predetermined period. CPU120) and
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S605 and S704) that executes a suggestion effect suggesting that the corresponding display changes to a display mode at a higher expectation stage.
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, a right frame LED 909c, and operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, microcomputer 90120 for effect control) and
An output means (for example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) that outputs a specific signal for driving an electric component (for example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) according to a control signal by a serial communication method from the control means. The light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter driver 90413a to 90413c) are provided.
The output means sets the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means as the first output state in which the waveform rises according to a predetermined mode (for example, the output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). )) And the second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode of change that is slower than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). It is possible (for example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), it is set to a normal slew rate output, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), it is set to a low slew rate output (FIG. 48). reference)),
The other output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 42, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the control signals are the same. (Transmitted sequentially between the illuminant drivers on the illuminant control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is set to H (high) and the output means is low. (Set to slew rate output state),
When the notification effect is being executed, the suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the notification effect is not executed (for example, in the process of step S605, the determination shown in FIG. 24). (Determine whether or not the action effect A Gase is executed by the ratio)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably raise the sense of expectation by suggestive production, and the interest is improved. In addition, the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be improved.

(2) In addition, in order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Corresponding display means (for example, 1st hold display part 5HL, 2nd hold display part 5HR, active display part AHA) capable of displaying the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display by any of a plurality of stages of display modes having different expectations.
An effect control that executes the processing of steps S604, S606, and S702 to execute the notification effect that continuously notifies that the corresponding display changes to the display mode at a higher expectation stage for a predetermined period. CPU120) and
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S605 and S704) that executes a suggestion effect suggesting that the corresponding display changes to a display mode at a higher expectation stage.
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, a right frame LED 909c, and operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, microcomputer 90120 for effect control) and
An output means (for example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) that outputs a specific signal for driving an electric component (for example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) according to a control signal by a serial communication method from the control means. The light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter driver 90413a to 90413c) are provided.
The output means sets the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means as the first output state in which the waveform rises according to a predetermined mode (for example, the output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). )) And the second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode of change that is slower than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). It is possible (for example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), it is set to a normal slew rate output, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), it is set to a low slew rate output (FIG. 48). reference)),
The other output means is provided on another board connected to the board on which the output means is provided via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable or a wire harness) (for example, FIG. 46 (2)). As shown, the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F, and the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F having different control signals. Sequentially transmitted),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 54, in the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, the S terminal is L (low). Is set to the normal slew rate output state),
When the notification effect is being executed, the suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the notification effect is not executed (for example, in the process of step S605, the determination shown in FIG. 24). (Determine whether or not the action effect A Gase is executed by the ratio)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably raise the sense of expectation by suggestive production, and the interest is improved. In addition, the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be improved.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
A plurality of the notification effects may be executed (for example, FIG. 27 (F)) corresponding to one corresponding display.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above
Corresponding to the above-mentioned notification effect, the corresponding display may be changed in a plurality of stages.
According to such a configuration, the effect of production is improved.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above
After the notification effect for notifying that the corresponding display changes to the highest stage display mode is executed, the execution of the suggestion effect is restricted (as shown in FIG. 24, the current display mode is "rainbow". Case action effect A Gase may not be executed).
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

(6) In any of the game machines (1) to (5) above,
Predetermined effect determining means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S801 and S802) for determining the effect mode of the predetermined effect, and
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing a hold notice effect) and
With
The predetermined effect determining means is
It is possible to decide to change the production mode at a plurality of change timings including at least the first timing and the second timing.
After determining the effect mode and the final effect mode when starting the predetermined effect, the change mode of the effect mode is determined based on the determined effect mode at the start and the final effect mode (step S801). After determining the display mode and the final display mode at the time of winning the corresponding display in step S802, the number of change stages in each hold display number is determined based on the level difference from the final display mode in step S802). Good.
With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the data capacity.

(7) In any of the game machines (1) to (6) above,
The first effect device (for example, sub display device 5S) and the second effect device (for example, image display device 5)
It is provided with a change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect (for example, a hold notice effect) that can change the display mode of the corresponding display.
The change effect executing means includes a first change effect (for example, action effect A of a modified example, see FIG. 29) capable of changing the display mode of the corresponding display using the first effect device, the first effect device, and the above. It is possible to execute a second change effect (for example, action effect B of a modified example, see FIG. 30) in which the display mode of the corresponding display can be changed by the mode linked with the second effect device.
The degree of expectation may be different depending on whether the first change effect or the second change effect is executed and the display mode of the corresponding display is changed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of the change effect by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of change effects.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means 8 to 15. Conventionally, as a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player. Some are configured to give to. Further, a variable display means capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display means, a predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give the player (so-called pachinko machine). Further, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time predetermined from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium determined in advance is paid out according to the prize, and a specific prize is generated, the player sets the game state to the predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give to (so-called slot machine). The winning value is to pay out the winning ball or give a score or a prize according to the winning of the game ball in the winning area. Further, the game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine becomes an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win a prize when a specific display result is obtained, or for the player. It is to generate the right to be in an advantageous state and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started by the variable display means based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If this is done, a "big hit (advantageous state)" will occur. The derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening opens a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, if a predetermined number (for example, 10) is won in the large winning opening, the large winning opening is closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each grand prize opening may be referred to as a "round".

Some such game machines are configured so that the waveform of the signal rises gently in order to suppress the radiation of radio waves from the substrate. For example, as shown in JP-A-2014-117505 (particularly, paragraphs 0071,096, FIG. 6), the signal processing unit (output means) has a waveform in which a signal rises more slowly than a square wave waveform. There is known a gaming machine that can suppress the occurrence of radio interference or the like by deforming and outputting a square wave so as to be.

According to such a game machine, radio wave radiation can be suppressed by making the waveform of the signal output by the output means slowly rise. However, if the waveform of the control signal rises gently uniformly, the resistance to noise from the outside of the board on which the output means is provided is insufficient, and the noise resistance of the control signal to prevent malfunction is sufficient. It may not be possible to increase it to. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine capable of increasing the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction.

(8) In order to achieve the above object, another aspect of the gaming machine is
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, a right frame LED 909c, and operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, microcomputer 90120 for effect control) and
An output means (for example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving an electric component according to a control signal by a serial communication method from the control means. , Light emitter driver 90411, motor drive driver 90412, illuminant driver 90413a to 90413c).
The output means sets the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means as the first output state in which the waveform rises according to a predetermined mode (for example, the output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). )) And the second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode of change that is slower than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). It is possible (for example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), it is set to a normal slew rate output, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), it is set to a low slew rate output (FIG. 48). reference)),
Other output means are provided in the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 42, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the control signals emit the same light emission. (Sequentially transmitted between illuminant drivers on the body control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is set to H (high) and the output means is low. It is characterized by being set to the output state of the slew rate).
According to such a configuration, the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be improved.

(9) In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the gaming machine of another aspect is
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, a right frame LED 909c, and operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, microcomputer 90120 for effect control) and
An output means (for example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving an electric component according to a control signal by a serial communication method from the control means. , Light emitter driver 90411, motor drive driver 90412, illuminant driver 90413a to 90413c).
The output means sets the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means as the first output state in which the waveform rises according to a predetermined mode (for example, the output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). )) And the second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode of change that is slower than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). It is possible (for example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), it is set to a normal slew rate output, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), it is set to a low slew rate output (FIG. 48). reference)),
Another output means is provided on another board connected to the board on which the output means is provided via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable or a wire harness) (for example, shown in FIG. 46 (2)). As described above, the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F, respectively, and the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F having different control signals are sequentially mounted. (Transmitted),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 54, the S terminal is L (low) in the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F. It is set to the normal slew rate output state).
According to such a configuration, the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be improved.

(10) In the game machine of (8) or (9) above
The output means is a specific signal output unit (for example, each driver output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) grouped into a plurality of different groups to a specific signal (for example, each driver output terminal Q0 to Q23) by a parallel communication method. , Q0 to Q11 output signals) (for example, in the case of a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, each group is divided into 6 groups of 4 channels as shown in FIG. 51. , In the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, each group is divided into 3 groups of 4 channels), and the output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit differs for each group (for example, As shown in FIG. 51, the output timings of the output signals from the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11 may be distributed for each group).
According to such a configuration, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be further suppressed.

(11) In the game machine of (10) above
The driving means (for example, operating motors 9060A to 9060C) provided with the movable members (for example, movable members 9051 to 9054) for operating the movable members is output from the specific signal output unit of the same group of the output means. It is configured to be driven based on a specific signal (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, for a signal input to the same operating motor, it is connected to a drive output terminal belonging to the same group). May be good.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in driving accuracy of the driving means while suppressing radio wave radiation from the substrate.

(12) In any of the game machines (8) to (11) above,
The output means has a stop function (for example, a time-out function) for stopping the output of a specific signal after a lapse of a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after inputting a control signal (for example, setting the T terminal to H (high)). By setting, the timeout function is set to the enabled state. See FIG. 48.).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a malfunction due to a wiring malfunction or the like, and it is possible to stably control electrical components.

(13) In the game machine of (12) above
The control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90120 repeats at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example) in the effect control process process (see step S9065). By outputting the control signal, the lighting control of the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b, and the right frame LED909c can be continuously executed, or the operation motors 9060A to 9060C can be continuously executed. It may be configured to include (controlling so as to continuously execute the drive control of).
According to such a configuration, control corresponding to the stop function of the output means can be realized.

(14) In the game machine of (12) or (13) above
The output means can enable or disable the stop function (for example, by setting the T terminal to L (low), the timeout function is set to the disabled state, and the T terminal is set to H (high). As a result, the timeout function is set to the enabled state. See FIG. 48.).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting of the stop function of the output means according to the application, and it is possible to reduce the cost by standardizing the parts.

(15) In any of the game machines (8) to (14) above,
The control means is provided on a first substrate (for example, an effect control substrate 9012).
A movable member (for example, movable members 9051 to 9054) that performs an operation is provided.
The control means
When the first substrate and the second substrate different from the first substrate are connected, the state of the movable member is detected based on a signal from a detecting means (for example, a movable member position sensor 9061). , The abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed (see, for example, steps S9058 to S9060 of the effect control main process).
When the first substrate and the second substrate (for example, the relay board for effect control 9016A) are not connected, control is performed so as not to notify the abnormality of the movable member (for example, in the effect control main process). It may be configured as described in step S9057 and the like).
With such a configuration, work efficiency in the manufacturing stage and the development stage can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows an example of various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the main production control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. It is a figure which shows the random number values MR1 to 3. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the special figure hold storage part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the special figure display result determination table and the jackpot type determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern determination table according to the variable display result. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the command buffer at the time of a start winning. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the effect control command received on the effect control board side, and the processing content which is executed in the command analysis process according to the received effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of hold display setting processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows the list of the correspondence display change pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the correspondence display change pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the list of the action effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an action effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination ratio in the action effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination ratio in the action effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an action effect execution process. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect image when the hold notice effect and the action effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect image when the hold notice effect and the action effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect image when the hold notice effect and the action effect in the modified example are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect image when the hold notice effect and the action effect in the modified example are executed. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the action effect in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change pattern determination processing in the modification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the winning and final display mode determination table in the modified example. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the change stage number determination table in the modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the action effect setting process in a modification. It is a front view of an example of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the case where a plurality of movable members are in the advanced state. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the effect movable mechanism. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows various circuits mounted on an effect control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the setting example of the storage content. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the light emitting body control board for performing the lighting control of a plurality of light emitting bodies which make up a light emitting body. It is a figure which shows the setting example which divides into a plurality of blocks. It is a figure which shows the connection setting example of a serial output system and a light emitting body block. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of a light emitter driver. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the drive control board, and the structural example of the light emitting body control board for performing lighting control of the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b and the right frame LED909c. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating each input / output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit shown in FIG. 47. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the slew rate setting of the through output of a clock signal and data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control data format. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the output timing of the signal from each drive output terminal in a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the connection example of a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification at the time of branching the control signal output by one light emitting body driver mounted on a light emitting body control board on a board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control process process. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the terminal of a connector, a harness, and the input / output contents. It is a figure which shows the execution example of abnormality notification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a memory inspection process. It is a figure which shows the display example of the operation content. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of an effect control pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the lighting data generation table. It is a figure which shows the composition example of audio data, and the operation example of playing music. It is a figure which shows the initial state and the operation pattern in the upper mechanism. It is a figure which shows the initial state and the operation pattern in the lower mechanism.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. A game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device into this game area.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode), and is used in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special symbol"), which is a plurality of types of identifiable identification information (special identification information), is variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". To do. After that, the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game. The finalized special symbol may be different from the special symbol displayed during the variable display.

The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". However, for example, there are a plurality of types of lighting patterns (a pattern in which all the LEDs are appropriately turned off may be included as a lighting pattern) in which the combination of the 7-segment LED to be turned on and the one to be turned off is different. It may be preset as a special symbol. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". ..

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, each of the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game is supported. For example, in a decorative symbol display area that is a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each are variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. Then, in the special symbol game, one of the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is started. Fluctuation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" on the image display device 5 are displayed. , The fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol), which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. The fixed decorative symbol may be different from the decorative symbol displayed during the variable display. For example, a decorative symbol other than the scroll-displayed decorative symbol may be a fixed decorative symbol.

As described above, on the screen of the image display device 5, a special figure game (also referred to as a first special figure game) using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A, or a second special symbol display device 4B In synchronization with the special figure game using the second special figure in (also referred to as the second special figure game), a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each is performed, and a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result is displayed. Derived display (or simply referred to as "derivative"). For example, to derive and display various display symbols such as special symbols and decorative symbols by displaying identification information such as decorative symbols as a stop display (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and ending the variable display. is there. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol becomes "0" and the decoration is displayed. The design may be stagnant and displayed, and may be in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction, for example. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitively displayed, the player can recognize that the change of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a first hold display unit 5HL, a second hold display unit 5HR, and an active display unit AHA are arranged. The first hold display unit 5HL displays the number of first special figure hold storage so as to be identifiable. The first special figure hold storage number is the number of variable display holdes corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The second hold display unit 5HR displays the number of second special figure hold storage identifiable. The second special figure hold storage number is the number of variable display holdes corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. To hold the variable display corresponding to the special figure game, the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. It occurs based on the starting prize by doing. That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state (advantageous state), etc., the variable corresponding to the established start condition is satisfied. The display is put on hold.

For example, when the first start prize is generated when the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening, the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A (first start condition). ) Is satisfied, and if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the number of stored first special figures is 1. It is added (incremented), and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, due to the occurrence of the second start prize in which the game ball passes (enters) the second start prize opening, the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B (second start condition). ) Is satisfied, and if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure hold storage number is 1. It is added (incremented), and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the reserved data (holding memory) is digested, the number of the first special figure held storage is decremented by 1, and the second When the execution of the special figure game using the special figure is started, the reserved data (held storage) is digested, and the number of the second special figure reserved storage is decremented by 1. If the number of reserved first special figures reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") when the first start prize is generated, the first start condition is not satisfied and the start prize is awarded. Based on the special figure game, the prize ball may be paid out only. Further, when the second start prize is generated, if the second special figure reserved memory number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the second start condition is not satisfied and the start prize is awarded. Based on the special figure game, the prize ball may be paid out only.

The variable display special figure hold storage number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also particularly referred to as the total hold storage number. The term "special figure reserved memory" usually refers to a concept including all of the first special figure reserved memory, the second special figure reserved memory, and the total reserved memory, but in particular, some of them (for example, the number of reserved memory). , The concept of including the number of reserved memory of the first special figure and the number of stored memory of the second special figure, but excluding the total number of reserved memories).

In the first hold display unit 5HL, the hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the first special figure is performed. The first hold display unit 5HL may be configured so that the first hold display is performed right-justified, for example. The first hold display unit 5HL is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit of the number of hold storages of the first special figure "4", and the hold numbers "1" and "2" are sequentially provided from the right end to the left side. , "3", "4" may be associated with each other. When the number of hold of the special figure game using the first special figure increases due to the establishment of the first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first hold display section 5HL, the hold is held in the first hold display section 5HL. At the rightmost display part corresponding to the number "1", a new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased number of first special figure hold storages. If there is another 1st hold display in the 1st hold display unit 5HL, the new 1st hold display is hidden on the left side of the display part where the other 1st hold display is performed. Add to the part (corresponding to any of the hold numbers "2" to "4"). When there are a plurality of first hold displays in the first hold display unit 5HL and a special figure game using the first special figure is started due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first hold display unit 5HL While erasing (digesting) the first hold display in the rightmost display part corresponding to the hold number "1", each of the first hold displays in the other display parts corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4" is displayed. Move (shift) in the direction (right side) of the erased display part.

In the second hold display unit 5HR, hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the second special figure is performed. The second hold display unit 5HR may be configured so that the second hold display is performed left-justified, for example. The second hold display unit 5HR is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit value of "4" of the second special figure hold storage number, and the hold numbers "1" and "2" are sequentially provided from the left end to the right side. , "3", "4" may be associated with each other. When the number of hold of the special figure game using the second special figure increases due to the establishment of the second start condition, if there is no other second hold display in the second hold display section 5HR, the hold is held in the second hold display section 5HR. At the leftmost display part corresponding to the number "1", a new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the increased number of second special figure hold storages. If there is another second hold display on the second hold display unit 5HR, the new second hold display is hidden to the right of the display part where the other second hold display is performed. Add to the part (corresponding to any of the hold numbers "2" to "4"). When there are a plurality of second hold displays in the second hold display unit 5HR and a special figure game using the second special figure is started due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second hold display unit 5HR The second hold display in the leftmost display part corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested), and each of the second hold displays in the other display parts corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4" is displayed. Move (shift) in the direction (left side) of the erased display part.

In the 1st hold display unit 5HL, an example is shown in which the 1st hold display is configured to be right-justified and the 1st hold display is shifted to the right when digested. 1 Hold display is configured to be performed and may be shifted to the left when digested. Similarly, in the second hold display unit 5HR, an example is shown in which the second hold display is configured to be left-justified and the second hold display is shifted to the left when digested. It is configured to have a second hold display and may shift to the right when digested.

The active display unit AHA displays the same effect image as the hold display or a different effect image corresponding to the variable display during execution. The display on the active display unit AHA is referred to as an active display (also referred to as a variable display compatible display, a digestion display, or a current display). In the active display unit AHA, for example, in response to the start of the special figure game using the first special figure when the first start condition is satisfied, the first reserved display unit 5HL is erased (digested). 1 Active display is performed according to the hold display. Further, in the active display unit AHA, for example, in response to the start of the special figure game using the second special figure when the second start condition is satisfied, it is erased (digested) by the second hold display unit 5HR. Active display is performed according to the second hold display. The first hold display, the second hold display, and the active display may have the same color and pattern. For example, the active display is displayed larger than the first hold display and the second hold display. It may be.

The first hold display and the second hold display are displays corresponding to the variable display to be executed from now on, and the active display is a display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Therefore, these are the corresponding displays corresponding to the variable display. Also called.

In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 1, an active display unit AHA is arranged between the first hold display unit 5HL and the second hold display unit 5HR. On the other hand, the active display unit AHA is not limited to the one arranged between the first reserved display unit 5HL and the second reserved display unit 5HR, and is arranged at an arbitrary position in the display area of the image display device 5. You just have to. Further, the arrangement of the first hold display unit 5HL and the second hold display unit 5HR can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the first hold display unit 5HL and the second hold display unit 5HR may be interchanged and arranged.

Along with the first hold display unit 5HL and the second hold display unit 5HR, or in place of the first hold display unit 5HL and the second hold display unit 5HR, a display for displaying the number of special figure hold storage may be provided. Good. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the number of special symbol hold storage can be specified on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B together with the first hold display unit 5HL and the second hold display unit 5HR. A first hold display 25A and a second hold display 25B for displaying are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of hold storages of the first special figure in a identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second special figure hold storage identifiable. The number of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B corresponds to, for example, the upper limit values (for example, "4") of the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number, respectively. For example, it is configured to include 4) LEDs. Here, the number of stored first special figures and the number of stored second special figures are displayed according to the number of LEDs lit. In addition, "variable display-related information" may be used as a generic term for information corresponding to each of the above-mentioned hold displays (first hold display, second hold display).

Below the image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed to a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is equipped with (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a second start winning opening.

As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. Do not close. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. ) Make it open. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normally open state when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter the second start winning opening, while the expanded open state when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. It may be configured so that the game ball does not easily pass (enter). As described above, the normal variable winning ball device 6B has a first variable state (passing (entry) easy state) such as an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter) through the second starting winning opening or an expanded open state, and a game ball. Is configured to be able to change to a second variable state (including a state where it is difficult to pass (enter) (including a state where it is impossible to pass (enter))) such as a closed state where it is impossible to pass (enter) or a normally open state where it is difficult to pass (enter) Has been done. The first variable state may be a state in which the game ball is easier to pass (enter) into the second starting winning opening than in the second variable state.

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game medium), and the number of stored first special figures is predetermined. If it is less than the upper limit value of (for example, "4"), the first starting condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure reserved memory number is less than the predetermined upper limit value. If so, the second starting condition is satisfied.

The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers from each other. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may directly pay out the game balls to be prize balls, or may give points corresponding to the number of game balls to be prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form a big prize opening as.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is off, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening, and the game ball enters the large winning opening (for example, Can't pass). On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become. In this way, the large winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball is easy to enter and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter and is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the big winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the grand prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball enters the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening ( More prize balls will be paid out than when entering). Therefore, if the large winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can pass (enter) through the large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball, and the first state. This is a second state that is more disadvantageous to the player.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, a plurality of types different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol (also referred to as "ordinary diagram" or "ordinary diagram"), which is the identification information, is variably displayed (variable display). Such a variable display of a normal pattern is called a normal figure game (also referred to as a "normal figure game"). A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and a passage gate 41 formed in the game area (a game ball is formed so as to be passable by a predetermined member, and the passage of the game ball is shown in FIG. The number of reserved spheres on hold is displayed as the number of effective passing spheres that have passed (detected by the gate switch 21 of 2).

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are used. It may be provided. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls that have entered any of the general prize openings are detected by the predetermined general prize ball switch. .. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 are provided around the game area. Decorative LEDs may be arranged around each structure (for example, ordinary winning ball device 6A, ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. .. At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) An upper plate (ball hitting plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower plate is provided to hold (store) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to the member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). Has been done. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator hangs when the player holds the operation stick). ing. The trigger button is a predetermined instruction operation by a player holding the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operating hand (for example, the left hand) and pressing and pulling the operation stick with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger). It suffices if it is configured so that A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button may be built in the operation stick.

A controller sensor unit 35A including a tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operation stick may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilting direction sensor unit is two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 1. A pair of) and two transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pair) arranged perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player's side. It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

The member forming the upper plate includes a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing, for example, a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 31A) on the upper surface of the upper plate body. Is provided. The push button 31B may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35B for detecting the player's operation action performed on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, and a lamp control board 14, as shown in FIG. 2, for example. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are arranged on the back surface of the game board of the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 mainly sends a command to a control board on the sub side including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of receiving a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. It has a function to output and transmit a control command (such as an effect control command described later) which is an example of information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to a hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the figure or controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. Further, the main board 11 also has a function of controlling the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like to display various hold storage numbers.

For example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted on the main board 11. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls (detection signals indicating that the passage or approach of the game medium has been detected (the switch has been turned on)), and the game control microcomputer 100 To transmit to. The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid for the grand prize opening door. It is transmitted to 82.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives an image display device 5, speakers 8L, and 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical components such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 includes all or part of the display operation of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or one of the lighting / extinguishing operations of the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. It has a function to cause an electric component for production such as a part to execute a predetermined production operation.

The voice control board 13 is a control board for voice output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is sound (effect) from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the signal (sound effect signal) from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing to output (audio specified by the sound signal). The lamp control board 14 is a control board for controlling lamp output provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED based on a signal (illumination signal) from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit that performs lighting / extinguishing drive (lighting / extinguishing according to the driving content indicated by the illumination signal).

As shown in FIG. 2, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), and a count switch 23 are transmitted to the main board 11. The wiring is connected. The various switches may have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a switch called a sensor. Further, a wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display 20, and the like is connected to the main board 11. Further, a wiring for transmitting a solenoid drive signal for driving a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory and a solenoid 82 for a big winning door is connected to the main board 11.

The control signal (control command) transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted as an electric signal (details will be described later). Each of the effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data may always be "1", and the first bit of the EXT data may be set in advance so as to be "0".

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control computer. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides a work area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform control operations, and an update of numerical data indicating a random value independently of the CPU 103. A random number circuit 104 for performing the above and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the function of the main board 11 is realized) by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. Processing for) is executed. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 may have at least a RAM 102 built in in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, and the like may be externally attached.

In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, a random number circuit 104 or the like counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game. Random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as a random number circuit 104, or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. You may. For example, numerical data indicating a predetermined random value is stored in a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 102, and the CPU 103 The random value may be updated by updating the stored value periodically or irregularly.

In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of command transmission tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data to be configured is stored.

In the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100, various data (including various flags, counters, timers, etc.) used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are temporarily stored in a rewritable manner. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, for example, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to a power failure (even if there is a so-called power failure), the backup power supply is supplied with the power supply for a predetermined period (for example, the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). Until it becomes impossible), the contents of a part or all of the RAM 102 are saved. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag, etc.) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data stored and backed up in the backup RAM in this way is appropriately referred to as backup data.

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port for inputting various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. To.

The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device. The display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in 5, the random number circuit 124 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and the I / O 125. And are installed.

As an example, in the effect control board 12, a process of controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component by executing the effect control program read from the ROM 121 by the effect control CPU 120 (predetermined for the effect electric component). The process of realizing the function of executing the effect operation) is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variation data to the RAM 122, and the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores the variation data in the RAM 122. A variable data read operation for reading various temporarily stored variable data, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, and an effect control CPU 120 is I / A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via the O125 is also performed.

The effect control CPU 120, ROM 121, and RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5 and wiring for transmitting an effect sound signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the voice control board 13. Wiring for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Further, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 35A and a game for the push button 31B A wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a person's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

In the effect control board 12, for example, a random number circuit 124 or the like counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation. The random number used to control such an effect operation is also called an effect random number. As an example, on the side of the effect control board 12, numerical data indicating various effect determination random values such as a random value for determining a stop symbol in a variable display of a decorative symbol and a random value for determining a notice effect can be counted. Is controlled by.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 contains a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination tables, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is a collection of data for executing various effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and reach effects. For example, effect control execution data (display) associated with a determination value such as a process timer determination value. It is composed of process data including control data, voice control data, lamp control data, etc.) and an exit code.

Various data (including various flags, counters, timers, etc.) used for controlling the effect operation are stored in the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12. Since the RAM 122 is not a backup RAM, the stored data will be lost when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (that is, when there is a power failure).

The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 is based on a display control command or the like from the effect control CPU 120 (for example, the display control unit 123 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 by this command). The control content of the display operation in the display device 5 is determined and executed. For example, the display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to execute variable display of decorative patterns and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed in the display screen of the image display device 5. To control. As an example, the display control unit 123 may be equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, or the like. The VDP may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. It may be configured.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 has, for example, an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. It is configured to include a port. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a sound effect signal transmitted to the audio control board 13, an illuminated signal transmitted to the lamp control board 14, and the like. Is output.

With the above configuration, the effect control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R via the voice control board 13 to output sound, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED via the lamp control board 14. The lighting / extinguishing drive is performed in the above, and the effect image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 via the display control unit 123 to execute various effects.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game is performed using a game ball as a game medium, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. The game value given in the game machine is directly the payout of the game ball as a prize ball and the granting of a score corresponding to this. The game ball and the recorded information of the score corresponding to the number of the game balls may be, for example, those having a valuable value that can be exchanged for a special prize or a general prize according to the quantity. Alternatively, the recorded information of these game balls and scores may have valuable value that can be used for another game in the game machine, although it cannot be exchanged for a special prize or a general prize.

Further, the game value that can be given by the game machine is not limited to paying out the game ball as a prize ball and giving points, for example, controlling to a big hit game state or controlling to a special game state such as a probability change state. The maximum number of rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the number of first rounds (for example, "16") that is larger than the number of second rounds (for example, "2"), and the execution is performed in a time-saving state. The upper limit of possible variable display is the first number (for example, "100"), which is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is the second probability (for example, 1/50). ) Is higher than the first probability (for example, 1/20), and the number of consecutive chans, which is the number of times the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled in the normal state, is the number of consecutive chans (for example, "1/20"). It may include a more favorable gaming situation for the player, such as part or all of the number of first consecutive chans (eg, "10") greater than 5 ").

As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined ball is hit based on a player performing a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) on a ball hitting operation handle installed at the lower right of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area by a launch motor or the like provided in the launch device. When the game ball that flowed down the game area entered the first start winning opening (first starting area) formed in the normal winning ball device 6A, the game ball was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The first starting condition is satisfied by the fact that the first starting port switch 22A is turned on. After that, for example, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. It will be started.

Further, when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening (second starting area) formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. The second starting condition is satisfied by the fact that the second starting port switch 22B is turned on. After that, for example, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is performed. It will be started. However, when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state, the game ball is difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter) to the second starting winning opening.

Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2 (the gate switch 21 is turned on), the normal symbol display 20 executes variable display of the normal symbol. The conditions for starting the general map are satisfied. After that, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, for example, that the previous normal symbol game has ended. .. In this normal symbol game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the variable display result of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol loss". In response to the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal figure", the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed so that the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 6B becomes the tilting position. , Closing control or normal opening control that returns to the vertical position after a predetermined time is performed. Whether or not the variable display result of the normal symbol is set to "per normal figure" as a predetermined specific display result depends on the variable display result such as when the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. Is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed.

When the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started, or when the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, it is special. Whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a "big hit" as a predetermined specific display result is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 shown in FIG. Is transmitted from to the effect control board 12.

After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variable pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern elapses, a definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result is displayed. Derived and displayed. "Left", "middle", and "right" decorations arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a variable display of a decorative symbol (directed symbol) different from the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, the definite special that results in the variable display of the special symbol. When the symbol is derived and displayed, the image display device 5 derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol.

When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the special symbol, the variable display result (special symbol display result) becomes a "big hit" (specific display result), and the jackpot as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. It is controlled to the game state. Whether or not the variable display game state is controlled corresponds to whether or not the variable display result becomes a "big hit", and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. As a variable display result of the special symbol, when the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed and the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result (special symbol display result) becomes "miss" (non-specific display result).

As an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers "1", "3", and "7" is used as a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is used as a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. However, the special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened and the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the first state which is advantageous for the player. Then, during a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls enter the large winning opening and a winning ball is generated, the large winning opening is continuously opened. A round game (simply also called a "round") is executed. During the period other than the execution period of such a round game, the large winning opening is closed, and the winning ball is difficult or impossible to be generated. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, the count switch 23 detects a winning ball (a game ball that has entered the large winning opening), and a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are used as prize balls for each detection. It will be paid out. The round game in the jackpot game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, "16") is reached.

When the variable display result is "big hit", the case where the big hit type is any one of "non-probable change", "probable change", and "probable change" is included. For example, as a variable display result of a special symbol, when the jackpot symbol indicating the number "3" is derived and displayed, the jackpot type is "non-probability", and when the jackpot symbol indicating the number "7" is derived and displayed, the jackpot is displayed. The type is "probability change". Further, when the jackpot symbol indicating the number "1" is derived and displayed, the jackpot type is "probability". When the jackpot type is "probability change" or "non-probability change", the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the first state (the jackpot is open) which is advantageous for the player as a round game in the jackpot game state. A normal open round in which the upper limit time to be performed is a predetermined time (for example, a first period such as 29 seconds) is executed for a predetermined number of times such as 16 rounds (16 times). In addition, when the jackpot type is "probability", the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (the jackpot is open) which is advantageous for the player as a round game in the jackpot game state. Is a predetermined time (for example, a first period such as 0.5 seconds), a normal open round is executed for a predetermined number of times such as two rounds (twice). The jackpot game state based on the "big hit" when the jackpot type is "non-probability change" is called "non-probability change jackpot game state". Further, the jackpot game state based on the "big hit" when the jackpot type is "probability change" is called "probability change jackpot game state". Further, the big hit game state based on the "big hit" when the big hit type is "sudden probability" is called "sudden big hit game state".

After the jackpot game state ends, the probability that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (big hit probability) may be controlled to a probabilistic state in which it is higher than the normal state. The probability change state is controlled so as to continue until a predetermined probability change end condition such as the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied. Further, after the jackpot game state is completed, the average variable display time may be controlled to a shorter time state than the normal state. In the time saving state, one of the variable display (special figure game) executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this form) and the start of the next big hit game state is the time saving end condition. It is controlled to continue until it is established first. The remaining number of executions of the variable display (special figure game, etc.) until the time saving end condition is satisfied may be referred to as the time saving remaining number. The time saving state and the probability change state are also advantageous states for the player.

When a predetermined small hit symbol (for example, "5") is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the special symbol, the variable display result (special symbol display result) becomes "small hit" and becomes a big hit after the big hit game state. It is a small hit that does not change the probability of becoming. When it becomes a small hit, it is controlled to a small hit game state in which the big winning opening is opened twice in substantially the same opening mode (for example, opening time 0.5 seconds) as when it becomes a sudden big hit. As a result, the player cannot specify whether it was a small hit or a sudden big hit from the opening mode of the big hit game. Moreover, when it becomes a small hit, the game state is not controlled to the time saving state. As a result, when it becomes a small hit and the big winning opening is controlled to be open twice, it is possible to give the player the impression that a sudden big hit has occurred. That is, the small hit can be used as a so-called false big hit of a sudden big hit.

In this form, the gaming state after the non-probability jackpot gaming state ends is a time saving state, but not a probabilistic state. In this form, the gaming state after the probability variation jackpot gaming state ends is the time saving state and the probability variation state.

The normal state is a game state other than an advantageous state such as a big hit game state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the variable display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure". The probability of "hit" and the probability of the variable display result in the special figure game becoming "big hit" are returned to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the system is reset in the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1. It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

In the time-saving state, the normally variable winning ball device 6B is placed in the first variable state (open state) in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting winning opening than in the non-time-saving state such as the normal state. Alternatively, it is changed to an expanded open state) and a second variable state (closed state or normally open state). For example, the normal symbol display 20 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the variable display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is "normal". Control to improve the probability of "hit the figure" compared to the normal state, tilt control time to control the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being "hit the normal figure" The normal variable winning ball device 6B is changed into the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode by controlling to make the normal variable winning ball device 6B longer than in the normal state and by controlling to increase the number of tilts as compared with the normal state. Just do it. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. In this way, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball device 6B into the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous changing mode is called high opening control (also referred to as "time saving control" or "high base control"). Will be done. By being controlled to such a time saving state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened, and the special gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

The time saving state is also called "high base state", "high base", etc., and the gaming state that is not the time saving state is also called "low base state", "low base", "non-time saving state", "non-time saving", etc. Will be The probabilistic state in which the probabilistic control is performed is also called "high probabilistic state", "high probabilistic state", etc. It is also called. The gaming state in the probabilistic state and the time saving state is also called "high accuracy high base state", "high accuracy high base" and the like. The gaming state when the time is shortened instead of the probability change state is also called "low probability high base state", "low probability high base state", or the like. The gaming state when the time is not shortened but is in the probabilistic state is also called "high probability low base state", "high probability low base state", or the like. A state that does not become either a time saving state or a probability change state, that is, a normal state is also called a "low probability low base state", a "low probability low base state", or the like.

In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is used. , Of the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the start of any special symbol game. Then, the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the final decorative symbol in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In (the period during the variable display), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established).

Here, the reach mode is a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (“reach variable symbol”). (Also referred to as) is a display mode in which the fluctuation is continuous, or a display mode in which all or part of the decorative symbols are changed in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) When the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric characters of "7") constituting the predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, the remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, "medium") that has not yet been stopped is displayed. In the decorative pattern display area 5C, etc.), the decorative pattern is fluctuating, or in all or part of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". This is a display mode in which the symbols fluctuate synchronously while forming all or part of the jackpot combination.

During the variable display of the decorative symbol, a character image (directed image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative symbol is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a background image is displayed, and the decorative symbol is An effect of playing back and displaying different moving images is executed. These effects are called variable display during variable display as well as variable display of decorative patterns. That is, the effect during variable display is an effect using an image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 along with the variable display of the special symbol, and is a concept including the variable display itself of the decorative symbol. Making the variable display mode a reach mode is also one of the effects during the variable display. In the variable display effect, in addition to the effect of the image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 (including the variable display of the decorative symbol itself) along with the variable display of the special symbol, the audio output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R Or, an effect by a lighting operation (blinking operation) in a light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 may be included.

A reach effect may be executed in the above variable display effect. The reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode. The reach effect changes the display mode of the background image, such as reducing the fluctuation speed of the decorative pattern, displaying a character image (effect image imitating a person, etc.) different from the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5. It is an effect that performs a different effect operation from before the reach mode is achieved by making the image play, displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, and changing the variation mode of the decorative pattern. The reach effect includes not only the display operation of the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation of the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (blinking operation) of the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the previous operation mode. In this form, as the reach effect, a normal reach, a super reach A, a super reach B, and a reach dedicated to a sudden / small hit are prepared.

In addition, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in the reach state, and the variable display result may be a "big hit". A variable display effect for notifying the player may be executed depending on the mode or the like. As an example, it is sufficient that the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream" can be executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Whether or not the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is executed may be determined in response to the determination of the variation pattern on the main board 11 side.

In the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", the variable display is performed after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once. After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" before the resulting finalized decorative symbol is derived and displayed. The effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo-continuous fluctuation) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be performed a predetermined time (for example, up to 3 times). The number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is the display of "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbols, excluding the initial variation from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the first temporary stop of all decorative symbols. This is the number of times the decorative pattern re-variates in all areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As an example, in the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", a plurality of predetermined pseudo-ream chances of a special combination are set in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". A decorative pattern that is one of the types of loss combinations is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, it is displayed to the player by, for example, performing a shaking fluctuation display or immediately re-changing the decorative symbol only by stopping for a short time. It suffices to notify that the decorative pattern is not fixed. Alternatively, even in the temporary stop display, the decorative symbol may be stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the once displayed decorative symbol has been confirmed, and then the decorative symbol may be changed again.

In the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", for example, as the number of pseudo-ream fluctuations (re-variations) increases, the possibility that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" increases. As a result, the player can recognize that the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is performed by temporarily stopping the pseudo-ream chance eye, and as the number of pseudo-ream fluctuations increases, the variable display result is displayed. The expectation of becoming a "big hit" is increased. In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-ream fluctuation (re-variation) once or twice. , The variable display of the decorative pattern can be made to appear as if it was started two or three times in a row. The number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) in the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" may be, for example, 4 times or 5 times.

When the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is executed, the re-variation effect by the related display effect is executed along with the multiple variation display (pseudo-ream variation) including the initial fluctuation. May be good. As an example, a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image may be displayed on the image display device 5 during each variation display (including the initial variation) by the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream". Further, the most variable effect may be executed by performing an arbitrary effect operation such as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and lighting operation of another light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9.

In addition to the "pseudo-ream", the variable display effect using the variable display operation of the decorative pattern includes, for example, "slip", "development chance eye", "development chance eye end", and "after the chance eye is stopped". Various production actions such as "sliding" may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of "slip", "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result. After changing the decorative symbol in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, one or more decorative symbol display areas (for example, "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in, a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporarily stopped display area (for example, "left" decorative symbols) By changing the decorative symbol again in one or both of the display area 5L and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R) and then stopping the display, the effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed.

In the variable display effect of the "development chance eye", the decorations of "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result. After the decorative symbols constituting the development chance eyes included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set as the reach state. Reach production is started. On the other hand, in the variable display effect of "end of development chance", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are all displayed. , An effect display is performed in which a predetermined combination of decorative symbols is derived and displayed as a final decorative symbol as a development chance eye. In the variable display effect of "slip after stopping the chance", as in the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result. , "Left", "Middle", "Right" Decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R After temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern of the lost combination (special combination) that is a pseudo-continuous chance eye in all Unlike the variable display effect of "pseudo-ren", which changes the decorative pattern again in all of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern changes again in a part of the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing so, an effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the variable display effect such as "pseudo-ream", for example, displaying a predetermined effect image, displaying an image as a message, or outputting a voice, etc. Due to the effect operation different from the variable display operation of the symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in the reach state, the reach effect by super reach may be executed, and the variable display result is ". A notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility of becoming a "big hit".

The effect operation that becomes the advance notice effect is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Is executed (started) before the reach mode is reached (before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right"). Further, the advance notice effect for notifying that the variable display result may be a "big hit" may include one executed after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode. In this way, the notice effect can be in the big hit game state at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to the derivation of the finalized special symbol or the confirmed decorative symbol that is the variable display result. Anything that can foretell sex will do. A plurality of notice patterns are prepared in advance according to the content (effect mode) of the effect operation when the advance notice effect is executed.

The advance notice effect includes a look-ahead advance notice effect (also referred to as a look-ahead effect). In the look-ahead notice effect, the variable display result is "big hit" according to the effect mode before the variable display is executed, which is the target (notice target) for which the possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit" is announced. It is a notice production that can announce the possibility of becoming. In particular, the look-ahead notice effect that continuously gives notice over the variable display of the decorative symbol that is executed a plurality of times in response to a plurality of special figure games is also referred to as a continuous notice effect. In the look-ahead notice effect, before the variable display to be notified is started, for example, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" based on the hold memory of the special figure game due to the occurrence of the start prize is announced. The production operation for doing is started. In this embodiment, as such a look-ahead notice effect, the variable display result may be a "big hit" by changing the display mode of the hold display (first hold display, second hold display) of the notice target. It is possible to execute a hold notice effect that can give notice. Specifically, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a hold notice effect in which the display shape and color of the hold display are gradually changed to a shape and color different from the normal time according to the change pattern according to the type of the background image. Is. In the active display in which the hold display is shifted, the display shape and color may change, but for the sake of explanation, they are collectively referred to as "hold notice effect".

In comparison with the look-ahead notice effect, the advance notice effect whose execution is started after the variable display to be notified is started is the "independent notice effect" ("independent notice", "the change notice", or "variable display in progress". It is also called "notice production").

In addition, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, an action effect suggesting that the display mode changes may be executed. When the action effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display changes as a result of the action effect. The action effect may include an arbitrary effect operation such as audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and a lighting operation of another light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9.

Next, the main operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the following, the operation will be described with reference to a flowchart or the like, but in each operation (each process), a process or the like that does not appear in the flowchart may be appropriately performed.

When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, RAM 101 is cleared. In addition, the register of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set. As a result, after that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, interrupts are permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, the process for returning the internal state of the pachinko game machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main side error processing, information output processing, game random number update processing, special symbol process processing, ordinary symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Processing for controlling the progress of the game is included. At the end of the game control timer interrupt process, the interrupt enabled state is set. As a result, the game control timer interrupt process is executed every time a timer interrupt occurs, that is, every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) which is the supply interval of the interrupt request signal.

In the switch processing, each switch determines whether detection signals have been input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. This is a process of determining whether or not the game ball is in the ON state (that is, whether or not the game ball has entered or passed) for each switch.

The error processing on the main side is a processing in which an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result.

The information output process is, for example, a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by software. As an example, the game random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 include a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. It may be included (see FIG. 6). The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit game state, and is “1”. It can take any value of ~ "65535". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "probability variation" or "non-probability variation" when the variable display result is "big hit", and is "1". It can take any value from "" to "100". The random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random number value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance, and is "1" to "1". It can take any value of "900".

In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1, and the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special symbol game is set as a "big hit". Determining whether or not to control the game state, determining the fluctuation pattern, controlling the display operation in the special symbol display device 4 based on the determination result (execution of the special figure game), and special variable winning ball device 7 in the jackpot game state. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform the opening / closing operation setting (execution of the round game and the short-term opening control) of the large winning opening in the predetermined procedure. The details of the special symbol process processing will be described later, but by executing the special symbol process processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern are determined, the special symbol game is executed based on the determination, and the jackpot game state. Etc. are realized.

In the normal symbol process processing, for example, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 (for example, when it is determined by the switch processing that the gate switch 21 is in the ON state), the number of holds has reached the upper limit. If not, the hold storage of the normal figure game (for example, extracting a random number value and storing it in the RAM 102) is performed, or the hold storage (random value stored in the RAM 102) is used to determine the variable display result of the normal figure game. Or, determine the fluctuation pattern (variation time, etc.) of the normal symbol game, or control the display operation (for example, turning on or off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 according to the fluctuation pattern to display the variable display of the normal symbol. It is executed to derive and display the variable display result of the normal figure game, or when the variable display result is a normal figure hit, the process of setting the normal variable winning ball device 6B to the first variable state such as the open state is performed. By executing the normal symbol process process each time a timer interrupt occurs, the execution of the normal symbol game and the first variable state of the normal variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period at the time of hitting the normal diagram are realized.

The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12. As an example, in special symbol process processing, ordinary symbol process processing, etc., transmission settings of control commands (effect control commands, etc.) (for example, the stored address value of the control command to be transmitted is stored in RAM 102) are performed, and command control is performed. In the process, a process of actually transmitting the control command set to be transmitted to the effect control board 12 is performed. In this transmission process, an effect control INT signal or the like is used, and a control command is transmitted.

After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, the main effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the command control process will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number.

The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern designation command) for designating a variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. In this form, a variation pattern specification command corresponding to each variation pattern is set. For example, a unique number (variation pattern number) is assigned to each variation pattern, and the number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, "01" for variation pattern PA1-1). The variation pattern specification command is also a command for designating the variation start of the decorative pattern.

Command 8A01 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning opening designation command) for designating that the first starting winning is generated due to the game medium entering the first starting winning opening. The command 8A02 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning opening designation command) for designating that the second starting winning prize has occurred due to the game medium entering the second starting winning opening. The first start winning opening designation command and the second starting winning opening designation command may be collectively referred to as a start winning entry designation command.

The command 8CXX (H) is an effect control command (display result specification command) that specifies whether or not to make a big hit and the big hit type, that is, a variable display result is specified. In this form, display result specification commands corresponding to each display result are set. For example, a unique number is assigned to each display result, and that number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, if "miss" is "00", if the jackpot type is "probability change", "big hit" "01" etc.).

The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first variation start designation command) for designating to start variable display (variation) of the first special symbol. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second variation start designation command) that specifies to start variable display (variation) of the second special symbol. The first fluctuation start designation command and the second fluctuation start designation command may be collectively referred to as a fluctuation start designation command. Information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern determination result specification command described later.

The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation command) that specifies that the variable display (variation) of the decorative symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed.

The command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (game state designation command) for designating the game state. In this form, game state specification commands corresponding to each game state are set. For example, if the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base), "XX" is set to "00". For example, if the gaming state is a high accuracy and low base state, "XX" is set to "01". For example, if the gaming state is a high accuracy and high base state, "XX" is set to "02".

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game state (start of fanfare). The fanfare is an effect that is executed at the start of the big hit game state to notify that the big hit game state has been reached. The command A100 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game state.

The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (command for designating the opening of the large winning opening) for designating the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A3XX (H) is an effect control command (a command designated after opening the large winning opening) for designating the closure of the special variable winning ball device 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command A601 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command) for designating the end (start of ending) of the jackpot game state. The ending is an effect of notifying the end of the big hit game state, which is executed at the end of the big hit game state. The command A602 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game state.

The command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (first special figure hold storage number designation command) for designating the first special figure hold storage number. “XX” indicates the number of first special figure reserved storage. The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (second special figure holding storage number designation command) for designating the second special figure holding storage number. “XX” indicates the second special figure reserved storage number. The first special figure reserved storage number designation command and the second special figure reserved storage number designation command may be collectively referred to as a "special figure reserved storage number designation command".

The command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (design determination result designation command) for designating a display result among the determination results at the time of starting winning. The command C5XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern determination result designation command) for designating a variation pattern among the determination results at the time of starting winning. In this embodiment, in the process of step S101 described later, when the first start winning or the second starting winning occurs, the random numbers MR1 to 3 are extracted. Regarding the variable display corresponding to the extracted random numbers MR1 to 3, the variable display is variable based on the random numbers MR1 and MR3 of the extracted random numbers MR1 to 3 before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied. Whether or not the display result is a "big hit" and the variation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 12) are determined. The determination at the time of starting winning refers to these determinations, and is executed in the random value determination processing at the time of winning in step S213. In a predetermined case, this determination may not be performed. A unique number is assigned to the judgment result (including the case where there is no judgment) about the display result, and the number is set to "XX" in the symbol specification command (for example, if "no judgment", " "00", "01" for "missing", "02" for "big hit", etc.). A unique number is assigned to the judgment result (including the case without judgment) for the fluctuation pattern, and the number is set to "XX" in the fluctuation pattern specification command (for example, if "no judgment" "00", "PA1-1" is "11", "PA1-2" is "12", "PB1-1" is "31", "PC1-1" is "61" "Such).

Next, the special symbol process processing will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101. When the start winning prize determination process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is on (). Step S201). When it is determined that the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes) because it is determined that the first start port switch 22A is on in the switch processing, the CPU 103 sets the first special drawing. It is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved stored number of the special figure game used, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 is the first stored value of the first special figure reserved storage number counter (counter for counting the first special figure reserved storage number) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.). It suffices if the first special figure reserved storage number can be specified by reading the special figure reserved storage number count value. When it is determined in step S202 that the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is not the upper limit value (step S202; No), the CPU 103 stores the start port buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control buffer setting unit, etc.). The starting port buffer value, which is a value, is set to "1" (step S203).

When it is determined in step S201 that the first start port switch 22A is off (step S201; No), or when it is determined in step S202 that the number of reserved first special figures has reached the upper limit value (step S202; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is on (step S204). When it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is on (step S204; Yes) because the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on in the switch processing, the CPU 103 sets the second special figure. It is determined whether or not the second special figure reserved memory number, which is the reserved stored number of the special figure game used, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 is a second stored value of a second special figure reserved storage number counter (counter for counting the second special figure reserved storage number) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.). It suffices if the second special figure reserved storage number can be specified by reading the special figure reserved storage number count value. When it is determined in step S205 that the number of reserved second special figure is not the upper limit value (step S205; No), the CPU 103 sets the start port buffer value to "2" (step S206). When it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is not on (step S204; No), or when it is determined that the second special figure reserved storage number is the upper limit value (step S205; Yes), the CPU 103 determines. Start The winning prize determination process ends.

After executing either the process of step S203 or S206, the CPU 103 updates so as to add 1 to the special figure reserved storage count value according to the start port buffer value (step S207). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the 1st special figure hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the 2nd special figure hold memory count value is added. Add 1 In this way, the 1st special figure reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the 1st start winning opening and the 1st start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the 1st special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). In addition, the second special figure reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). At this time, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.), is updated so as to be added by 1 (step S208).

After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning prize (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number for determining the special figure display result is determined from the numerical data updated by the random number counter or the like provided in the predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102. Numerical data (see FIG. 6) showing the numerical value MR1, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored as hold data by being set at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. 7A. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. 7 (B). At this time, when the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 can control the first hold indicator 25A to specify the number of the first special figure hold storage added by one. The first hold indicator 25A may be made to perform such a display (for example, the number of LEDs lit by one is increased). When the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to display a display capable of specifying the number of the second special figure hold storage added by one. The second hold indicator 25B may be made to perform (for example, increase the number of LEDs lit by one).

The first special figure reservation storage unit shown in FIG. 7A has not been started yet, although the game ball has entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first starting winning has been generated. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game balls) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the entry of the game ball. The number of stored data such as the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are reserved data. Is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes memory information.

It should be noted that the hold number of the first special figure hold storage unit and the display position of the hold display symbol (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond to each other. Therefore, when the hold data is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "1", the hold display symbol is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the first hold display unit 5HL. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "2", the hold display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the first hold display unit 5HL. To do.

The second special figure reservation storage unit shown in FIG. 7B has been started even though the game ball has entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning has been generated. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the second starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are used as pending data, and the numbers are Storage is performed until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes memory information.

It should be noted that the hold number of the second special figure hold storage unit and the display position of the hold display symbol (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond to each other. Therefore, when the hold data is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "1", the hold display symbol is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the second hold display unit 5HR. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "2", the hold display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the second hold display unit 5HR. To do.

After executing the process of step S210, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the start winning opening designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S211). After that, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the hold storage number notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S212).

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number value determination process (step S213). As described above, the winning random number value determination process is a process for determining the starting winning value, and the random number value is based on the random number values MR1 and MR3 of the random number values MR1 to 3 extracted in step S209. This is a process for determining whether or not the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target is a “big hit” or a “small hit” and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 12). After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the start port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S214). At this time, if it is determined that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S214; "2"), the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (). Step S215), the start winning determination process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start port buffer value is "1" (step S214; "1"), the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0". (Step S216), the process proceeds to step S204. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S213 of FIG. 5 as the winning random number value determination process. In this form, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set as "big hit" or "small hit" by the special symbol normal processing, and the big hit game state or A decision is made as to whether or not to control the small hit game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, in the winning random number value determination process, the game ball is extracted at the starting winning timing detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening) at this timing. Judgment as to whether or not the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target of the randomized value (random value extracted in the process of step S209) is "big hit" or "small hit", and variable display of the decorative symbol. It determines which fluctuation pattern will be (so-called "look-ahead"). As a result, the special symbol display result becomes "big hit" before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started (before the start condition of the special symbol game is satisfied). It is pre-read that it will be a "small hit" and that the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be the predetermined display mode, and based on this pre-reading result, the effect control board 12 will display the hold display by the effect control CPU 120 or the like. The display mode and the like can be determined.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 8, the CPU 103 first, for example, includes a time saving flag (a flag that turns on when the time saving state is set) provided in a predetermined area (game control flag setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102. The current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified by confirming the state of the probability change flag (the flag that turns on when the probability change state is reached) (step S301). The CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the jackpot gaming state by checking the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control flag control unit, etc.). To identify. For example, when the value of the special figure process flag is "4" to "7", it may be specified that the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the jackpot gaming state.

Following the process of step S301, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the specified gaming state is in the jackpot gaming state (step S302). When it is determined that the jackpot is not hit (step S302; No), the CPU 103 further determines whether or not the high base is in the high open control accompanying the time reduction control in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (step S303). ). When it is determined that the base is high (step S303; Yes), or when it is determined that the jackpot is in the process of step S302 (step S402; Yes), the CPU 103 has a start port buffer value of "2". It is determined whether or not there is (step S304). When it is determined that the start port buffer value is not "2" (step S304; No), the CPU 103 makes a setting for limiting the determination at the time of winning (step S306).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S304; Yes), or when it is determined that the high base is not in the process of step S303 (step S303; No), the CPU 103 is shown in FIG. From the 1st special figure display result determination table or the 2nd special figure display result determination table shown in 10 (A) and (B), the start port buffer value ("1" or "2") and the current gaming state are supported. The special figure display result determination table used for determining the special figure display result is selected (step S305).

Following the process of step S305, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S307). The CPU 103 compares, for example, the individual determined values included in the jackpot determination range with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by the process of step S209 shown in FIG. 5 one by one. It may be determined whether or not there is a determined value that matches MR1. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the decision value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. By comparing, it may be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, if it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit" (big hit start determination). it can.

In the process of step S307, for example, the CPU 103 may read the random number value MR1 stored in the special figure reservation storage unit in step S210, and perform the above determination using the read random number value MR1. Further, the CPU 103 holds the random number value MR1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (an area other than the special figure reservation storage unit) or a storage area of the CPU 103 separately from the step S210, and makes the above determination based on the held random number value. May be done. This also applies to the random number value MR3 described later. As described above, the random number value used in the winning random number value determination process does not have to be the random number value stored in the special figure holding storage unit.

When it is determined in the process of step S307 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range (step S307; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S308). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10C. The CPU 103 determines which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data.

Following the process of step S308, the CPU 103 selects a jackpot variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 13) prepared in advance by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 and sets it in the table to be used (step S309). .. The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result becomes a “big hit”, and a determination value to be compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13, the determination ratio is described instead of the range of the determination values. In the actual table, it is sufficient that the determination values in the range corresponding to the determination ratio of FIG. 13 are assigned to each fluctuation pattern. The determination ratio is a ratio in which the entire range (1 to 900) of the values that the random value MR3 can take is set to 100. For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, when the jackpot type is probabilistic / non-probable, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern PB1-1 is 5, the determination rate of the variation pattern PB1-2 is 25, and the variation pattern PB1- Since the determination ratio of 3 is 70, the variation pattern PB1-1 is assigned a determination value 1 to 45 (range of 5%) to be compared with the random value MR3, and the variation pattern PB1-2 is assigned a random value MR3. A decision value of 46 to 270 (range of 25%) to be compared is assigned, and a decision value of 271 to 900 (range of 70%) to be compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PB1-3. The allocation of such a decision value is the same for other tables in which the decision ratio is described.

When it is determined in the process of step S307 that it is not within the jackpot determination range (step S307; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step). S310). The CPU 103 executes the same processing as in the case of the big hit determination range for the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table selected by the process of step S305. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range.

When it is determined that the small hit is within the small hit determination range (step S310; Yes), a small hit fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 13B) prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected. And set it in the usage table (step S312). The small hit fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is "small hit", and a determination value to be compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit is not within the small hit determination range (step S310; No), the loss fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (FIGS. 13C and 13D). ) Is selected and set in the usage table (step S311). Specifically, when the current gaming state specified in step S301 is a non-time saving state (low base state) (when the time saving flag is off), the loss fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. 13C is displayed. When the current gaming state specified in step S301 is the time saving state (high base state) (when the time saving flag is on), the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 (D) is used. Set in the usage table. The loss variation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variation pattern of the variable display in which the variable display result becomes "loss", and a determination value to be compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each variation pattern.

After executing any of steps S309, S311, and S312, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot fluctuation pattern set in the usage table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted in step S209. The variation pattern assigned to the determination value that matches the random number value MR3 is determined by referring to any one of the table, the small hit variation pattern determination table, and the loss variation pattern determination table (step S313). The CPU 103 determines the variation pattern by, for example, comparing the individual determination values assigned to each variation pattern with the random number value MR3 one by one to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR3. Alternatively, the CPU 103 sets a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value assigned to each fluctuation pattern, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR3 and the minimum value of the determination value. Or the fluctuation pattern may be determined by comparing with the maximum value.

After executing any of the processes of steps S306 and S313, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the start winning command according to the determination result of step S308 or step S313 (step S314), and determines the random value at the time of winning. To finish. The start winning command is composed of a starting winning opening designation command, a special figure hold storage number designation command, a symbol judgment result designation command, and a variation pattern judgment result designation command. When the start opening buffer value is "1", the first start winning opening designation command, the first special figure hold storage number designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation are used as start winning commands. Set the command and send. When the start opening buffer value is "2", the second start winning opening designation command, the second special figure hold storage number designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation are used as start winning commands. Set the command and send. The command set for transmission is transmitted in the command control process.

The 1st special figure hold storage number specification command and the 2nd special figure hold storage number specification command to be set for transmission are commands for specifying the current 1st special figure hold storage number and 2nd special figure hold storage number (to the storage number). The command including the corresponding EXT data) may be specified, and the number of special figure reserved storage to be specified may be specified by the count value of the first special figure reserved storage number counter or the second special figure reserved storage number counter. When the determination result in step S307 is within the jackpot determination range (step S307; Yes), the symbol specification command to be set for transmission is a command that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is "big hit" (to "big hit"). A command that includes the corresponding EXT data), and when the determination result in step S307 is within the small hit determination range (step S310; Yes), a command that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is "small hit" ("small hit"). A command that includes EXT data corresponding to "small hit"), and when the judgment result in step S310 is not within the small hit determination range (step S310; No), a command that specifies that the judgment result of the variable display result is "missing". (A command including EXT data corresponding to "loss"), and when the determination result in step S303 is the start port buffer value = 1 (step S304; No), the determination at the time of starting winning is not performed "No determination". It may be a command that specifies that (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to "no judgment"). The variation pattern determination result specification command to be set for transmission is a command for specifying the variation pattern that is the determination result when the variation pattern is determined in step S313 (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to the variation pattern that is the determination result). When the determination result in step S304 is the start port buffer value = 1 (step S304; No), the command (EXT corresponding to "no determination") that specifies that the determination at the time of starting winning is not performed is "no determination". It can be a command that includes data).

In the winning random number value determination process, as described above, regarding the variable display corresponding to the random number values MR1 to 3 extracted in step S209 this time, the variable display result of the variable display (special figure game) is "big hit" or "small". Whether or not it becomes a "hit" and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 13) are determined, and so-called look-ahead is performed. In this process, the determination is made based on the current gaming state, and the determination is not made based on the gaming state when the variable display is actually executed. Therefore, the determination is not always accurate, but to some extent. Variable display results and fluctuation patterns can be predicted with accuracy. Further, in the winning random number value determination process, the start is started by the process of step S304 based on the case where it is determined that the big hit is being made in the process of step S302 or the time reduction control is being performed in the process of step S303. It is determined whether or not the mouth buffer value is "2". At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" and not "2", the process proceeds to step S314 without executing the process such as step S305, and the determination at the time of starting winning is not performed. In this way, when the high opening control accompanying the time saving control is performed or when the big hit game state is performed, each of the above is based on the occurrence of the start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball entering the first start prize opening. Limit the judgment so that it is not made. As a result, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, and the time reduction control is in progress or the jackpot game state is in effect, the first start prize is won. It is possible to ensure the soundness of the game by limiting the pre-reading based on the above.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area (game control flag setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102. Select one of the processes to execute.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A or the like is based on the presence or absence of reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, such as the first special symbol reservation storage unit and the second special symbol reservation storage unit. The second special symbol display device 4B determines whether or not to start the special symbol game. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the variable display result determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as a "big hit" based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. Derived Determined (predetermined) before being displayed. At this time, when the variable display result is determined to be "big hit", the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types such as "non-probable change", "probable change", and "probable change". The jackpot type is stored by storing the data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer provided in the predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the fixed special symbol (big hit symbol,) in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B corresponds to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Loss pattern) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal processing executed in step S110 shown in FIG. When the special symbol normal processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol hold storage number is "0" (step S231). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 may read the second special figure reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When it is determined in step S231 that the number of the second special figure reserved storage is other than "0" (step S231; No), the CPU 103 determines, for example, the head area of the second special figure reserved storage unit (for example, the hold number "1"). As the reserved data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, such as the storage area corresponding to the above), numerical data indicating a predetermined random value is read out (step S232). As a result, the game random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start prize (second start prize) at the second start prize opening in the process of step S209 are read out. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S232, the CPU 103 is updated so as to subtract 1 from the 2nd special figure reserved storage number by, for example, subtracting 1 from the 2nd special figure reserved storage number count value. The storage content in the second special figure reservation storage unit is shifted (step S233). For example, the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number "1" (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit is placed one entry higher (upper entry). The storage area corresponding to the hold numbers "1" to "3") is shifted. Further, in the process of step S233, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the CPU 103 updates the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variation special figure designation buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, the game control buffer setting unit), to "2" (step S234). ..

When it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step S231; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step S231; Yes). Step S235). The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 may read the first special figure reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is "0". As described above, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved storage number is "0", and the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, regardless of whether it is the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, if the special figure game is executed in the order in which the game balls enter the starting winning opening, the first starting winning opening The start opening data indicating which of the two start winning openings and the second start winning opening the game ball has entered is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in association with the hold number together with the hold data or separately from the hold data. For the special figure game corresponding to each reserved data, the order in which the start conditions are satisfied may be specified.

When it is determined in step S235 that the number of reserved first special figures is other than "0" (step S235; No), for example, it corresponds to the head area of the first special figure reserved storage unit (for example, the reserved number "1"). Numerical data indicating a predetermined random value is read out as reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, such as a storage area to be stored (step S236). As a result, the game random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start prize (first start prize) at the first start prize opening in the process of step S236 are read out. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S236, the CPU 103 is updated so as to subtract 1 from the 1st special figure reservation storage number by, for example, subtracting 1 from the 1st special figure reservation storage number count value. The storage content in the first special figure reservation storage unit is shifted (step S237). For example, the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number "1" (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit is placed one entry higher (upper entry). The storage area corresponding to the hold numbers "1" to "3") is shifted. Further, in the process of step S237, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

After executing any of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the CPU 103 determines the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, as either "big hit" or "loss" (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a table used for determining the special figure display result. For example, the CPU 103 sets the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10 as a table to be used. In the special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10, the numerical value (decision value) compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines the special figure display result as "big hit" and "miss". It suffices that the game state is assigned according to whether or not the game state is a probabilistic state or not.

The CPU 103 reads numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result included in the game random number temporarily stored in the variable random number buffer in step S232 or S236 from the variable random number buffer, and the game state is in the probabilistic state. By referring to the special figure display result determination table based on whether or not there is, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1, whether or not the game state is in the probable change state to the determined value that matches the random number value MR1. Depending on the situation, one of the assigned "big hit", "small hit", and "loss" determination result may be determined as the special figure display result.

In this embodiment, as the special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10 (A) and the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10 (B) are previously provided. It is prepared. The first special symbol display result determination table displays the variable display result before the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result, is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. Whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit" and whether or not to control the variable display result to the small hit game state as "small hit" is determined based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a table referenced to do. The second special symbol display result determination table 130B shows the variable display result before the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result, is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit" and whether or not to control the variable display result to the small hit game state as "small hit" is determined based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. A table that is referenced to determine.

In the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10A, whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). Correspondingly, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit", "small hit", and "loss". In the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10B, the special figure is shown according to whether the gaming state is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss".

In the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, the table data showing the decision value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result has the special figure display result as a "big hit". It is the decision data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state. In each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is in the probability change state (high probability state), it is higher than when it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Many decision values are assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Controlling to a state increases the probability of being determined. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state, it is a big hit as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of being determined to control the gaming state is high.

In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table, the determination value in a predetermined range (value in the range of "30000" to "30100") is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table, the determination value is not assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". With such a setting, the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. Depending on the case where the variable display result is determined based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the special figure display result is displayed. The ratio determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" can be different.

In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state, so for example, a time saving state (low accuracy high base state) or Frequent small hit game states in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball in a game state in which a game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, such as a probability change state (high probability high base state). It is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the extension of the game. In the second special figure display result determination table as well, a determination value in a predetermined range different from the setting in the first special figure display result determination table may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". .. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table, a smaller determination value than in the first special figure display result determination table may be assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". In this way, even if the ratio determined to be controlled to the small hit game state is lower in the high base state such as the time saving state or the probability change state than in the low base state such as the normal state or the probability change state without time reduction. Good. Alternatively, regardless of whether the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the special figure display result is determined by referring to the common special figure display result determination table. You may try to make a decision.

After that, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S239 is a "big hit" (step S240). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" (step S240; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 to the ON state (step S241). Further, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, a jackpot type determination table prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 is selected and set as a table used for determining the jackpot type. For example, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10C as the table to be used. In the jackpot type determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10C, the numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are "non-probability variation", "probability variation", and "probability variation" of the jackpot type. It suffices if they are assigned to "probability" respectively.

The CPU 103 reads the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type included in the game random number temporarily stored in the variable random number buffer in step S232 or S236 from the variable random number buffer, and reads out from the variable random number buffer. By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in the usage table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for type determination, one of the jackpot types to which the determination value matching the random number value MR2 is assigned is selected. do it.

FIG. 10C shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table determines the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced by. In the jackpot type determination table 131, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variation) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol). Depending on whether it is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B), there are multiple numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, such as "non-probability variation", "probability variation", and "probability". It is assigned to the type of jackpot type.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table, the assignment of the determination value for the jackpot type of "probability" is different depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. That is, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the determined value in a predetermined range (the value in the range of "70" to "99") is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability", while the variable special figure is assigned. When is the second special figure, a determined value is not assigned to the jackpot type of "probability". With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type as "probable" can be different. In particular, in a special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is set to "probability" and controlled to the short-term open jackpot state. In a game state in which a game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the device 6B, avoiding the frequent occurrence of a short-term open jackpot state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and preventing a decrease in the game interest due to the extension of the game. it can.

Even when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a determination value in a predetermined range different from the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability". Good. For example, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a smaller decision value than when the variable special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the jackpot type of "probability". Alternatively, regardless of whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data.

After executing the process of step S242, the CPU 103 stores the jackpot type (step S243). The CPU 103 puts a jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, a game control buffer setting unit) into a jackpot type buffer setting value indicating a determination result of the jackpot type (for example, "0" in the case of "non-probability change". , In the case of "probability change", a value that becomes "1") may be stored to store the jackpot type.

When it is determined that the special figure display result is not a "big hit" (step S240; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step S244). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step S244; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the small hit flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 to the ON state (step S245).

After executing the process of step S243, after executing the process of step S245, or when it is determined in the process of step S244 that the special figure display result is not a "small hit" (step S244; No). , CPU 103 determines a definite special symbol that is a variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game (step S246). For example, when it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is "big hit", the CPU 103 determines a plurality of types of big hit symbols according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S242 (according to the big hit type buffer set value). One of the special symbols predetermined as is determined as the final special symbol. Further, when it is determined in step S240 that the special symbol display result is "small hit", the CPU 103 determines any of the special symbols predetermined as the small hit symbol as the final special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S244 that the special symbol display result is not a "small hit", the CPU 103 determines a special symbol predetermined as a lost symbol as a final special symbol.

After executing the process of step S246, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "1" (step S247), and ends the special symbol normal process. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "1" in step S247, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 4 is executed.

In the process of step S235, when it is determined that the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" (step S235; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the predetermined demo display (Yes). Step S248), the special symbol normal processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the control board 12. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the customer waiting demo specification command is set to be transmitted, and then the demo display setting is terminated. When the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the effect control board 12 displays the demo screen.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit". Since the variable pattern specifies the content of the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display mode), the content of the variable display of the decorative symbol is determined by this determination. The variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is preset according to the variable pattern. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time (special symbol variation time) from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the derivation of the finalized special symbol that is the variable display result is determined. Will be done. Further, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of setting the special symbol display device 4 to start the variation of the special symbol. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process executed in step S111 shown in FIG. When the variation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step S261). When it is determined that the jackpot flag is on (step S261; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot when the special figure display result is "big hit" (step S262). When it is determined in the process of step S261 that the big hit flag is in the off state (step S261; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is in the on state (step S263). When it is determined that the small hit flag is on (step S263; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern corresponding to the small hit when the special figure display result is "small hit" (step S264). On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit flag is in the off state (step S263; No), the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the loss when the special figure display result is “loss” (step S265).

FIG. 12 shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern.

The variation pattern PA1-1 is selected when the variable display result is "missing", specifies non-reach (the variable display mode does not become the reach mode), and the special figure fluctuation time is normal. It is a non-reach variation pattern of length.

The fluctuation pattern PA1-2 is selected when the variable display result is "missing", specifies non-reach (the variable display mode does not become the reach mode), and the special figure fluctuation time is longer than usual. Is also a non-reach variation pattern for short time savings.

The variation pattern PA2-1 is selected when the variable display result is “missing”, and is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PA2-2 is selected when the variable display result is “missing”, and is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of the super reach A. The variation pattern PA2-3 is selected when the variable display result is “missing”, and is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of the super reach B.

The variation pattern PB1-1 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach variation pattern that specifies execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PB1-2 is selected when the variable display result is "big hit", and is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of super reach A. The variation pattern PB1-3 is selected when the variable display result is "big hit", and is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of the super reach B.

The variable pattern PC1-1 is selected when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability", and when the variable display result is "small hit", and specifies non-reach. It is a non-reach fluctuation pattern. The variable pattern PC1-2 is selected when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "sudden probability", and when the variable display result is "small hit", and is exclusively for sudden / small hit. A reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of reach. Here, the reach for exclusive use of sudden / small hit is a reach that can be selected and determined only when the variable display result is sudden big hit or small hit. The decorative symbol for the sudden jackpot is a symbol in which the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is stopped and displayed at "3", "5", and "7". The decorative symbol for small hits is a symbol in which the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is stopped and displayed at "2", "4", and "6".

In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 11, for example, the fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13A, which is stored in advance in a predetermined area of ROM 101. As an example, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern. The CPU 103 refers to the jackpot variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 read from the variation random number buffer, and thereby assigns the variation assigned to the determination value matching the random number value MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the current fluctuation pattern. In addition, in FIG. 13A, the determination ratio is shown instead of the determination value.

In the process of step S264 shown in FIG. 11, for example, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a small hit is determined using the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13B, which is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101. .. As an example, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 is assigned to a determined value that matches the random number value MR3 by referring to the small hit variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation. The fluctuation pattern may be determined (selected) as the current fluctuation pattern. In FIG. 13, the determination ratio is shown instead of the determination value. In addition, in FIG. 13B, the determination ratio is shown instead of the determination value.

In the process of step S265 shown in FIG. 11, for example, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined by using the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 13 (C) and 13 (D) stored in advance in the predetermined area of the ROM 101. Will be done. When the gaming state is the non-time saving state (time saving flag is off), the CPU 103 refers to the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13C. When the gaming state is the time saving state (time saving flag is on), the CPU 103 refers to the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 (D). As an example, in each loss fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern. The CPU 103 refers to the loss variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 read from the variation random number buffer, and thereby assigns the variation assigned to the determination value matching the random number value MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the current fluctuation pattern. In addition, in FIGS. 13C and 13D, the determination ratio is shown instead of the determination value.

In the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 13 (C) and 13 (D), the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 having a short special figure fluctuation time is more likely to be selected in the time saving state, and is averaged as compared with the non-time saving state. It is possible to shorten the variable display time, suppress the occurrence of invalid start winnings, and reduce the player's stoppage of launching the game ball (so-called "stop hitting"). In addition, the execution frequency of the variable display can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 13, at the time of big hit (probability change / non-probability change), the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern PB1-3 that executes the super reach B is the highest, and the fluctuation pattern PB1-2 of the super reach A and the fluctuation of the normal reach. The determination rate gradually decreases in the order of pattern PB1-1. At the time of loss, the determination rate of the non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 (including PA1-2) is the highest, and the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, the super reach A variation pattern PA2-2, and the super reach B are determined. The determination rate gradually decreases in the order of the fluctuation pattern PA2-3. From this, when Super Reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" at the highest rate. Then, in the order of Super Reach A and Normal Reach, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (so-called big hit expectation) decreases.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, at the time of big hit (sudden probability), the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern PC1-2 of the sudden / small hit reach is higher than the determination ratio of the non-reach fluctuation pattern PC1-1. On the other hand, at the time of small hit, the determination ratio of the non-reach fluctuation pattern PC1-1 is higher than the determination ratio of the sudden / small hit reach fluctuation pattern PC1-2. From this, when the variation pattern PC1-2 of the sudden / small hit reach is executed, the variable display result tends to be “big hit (abrupt probability)”, and when the non-reach variation pattern PC1-1 is executed, The variable display result tends to be a "small hit".

After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264, and S265, the CPU 103 sets a special figure fluctuation time (also referred to as a fluctuation time), which is a variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. Is. As shown in FIG. 12, the special figure fluctuation time is predetermined in accordance with a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived by setting the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in each of the processes of steps S262, S264, and S265. The special figure fluctuation time is set, for example, by setting a timer value according to the special figure fluctuation time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Following the process of step S266, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B are started. A setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is made so as to start any of the special symbol games for which the conditions are satisfied (step S267). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. As a result, the special figure game is started. When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first hold display 25A to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted 1st special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25A may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one). When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second hold display 25B to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted second special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25B may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one).

After executing the process of step S267, the CPU 103 issues a command at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (command at the start of fluctuation) in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the special symbol display result, the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, and the like. Transmission settings are made (step S268). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends the first fluctuation start designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command as the fluctuation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 ( A command including EXT data indicating a fluctuation pattern determined in step S262 or S263), a display result specification command (a command including EXT data indicating a variable display result determined in step S244), and a first special figure hold storage number specification command (command containing EXT data indicating a variable display result determined in step S244). The first special figure reserved memory count value decremented by 1 in step S237, that is, the command including the EXT data indicating the first special figure reserved memory when one reserved memory is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game). Make transmission settings for sequential transmission. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the second fluctuation start designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command as the fluctuation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 ( A command including EXT data indicating a fluctuation pattern determined in step S262 or S263), a display result specification command (a command including EXT data indicating a variable display result determined in step S244), and a second special figure reserved storage number specification command (command containing EXT data indicating a variable display result determined in step S244). The second special figure reserved memory count value decremented by 1 in step S233, that is, the command including the EXT data indicating the second special figure reserved memory when one reserved memory is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game). Make transmission settings for sequential transmission.

After executing the process of step S268, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "2" (step S267), and then ends the variation pattern setting process. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" in step S267, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 4 is executed.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special diagram process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process of subtracting 1 from the timer value of the game control process timer. Then, when the timer value of the game control process timer (timer value after subtracting 1) is not 0, the special figure fluctuation time has not elapsed, so control for executing the variable display of the special figure game (for example, the first The first special symbol display device performs such as updating the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (control of transmitting a drive signal for appropriately including an update for maintaining the display of the special symbol for a predetermined time; the same applies hereinafter). The 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B performs a process for changing the special symbol, and ends the special symbol variation process. On the other hand, when the timer value of the game control process timer becomes 0 and the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display In the device 4B, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, and the confirmed special symbol (the confirmed special symbol set in step S110) which is the variable display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (deriving display) (the confirmed special symbol is displayed for a predetermined time). It is good to control so that it continues to be performed), and when the stop display is displayed, the transmission setting of the symbol confirmation specification command is also set, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3". By repeatedly executing step S112 each time a timer interrupt occurs, variable display of a special symbol, derivation display of a confirmed special symbol, and the like are realized.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is in the ON state. When the jackpot flag is on, the CPU 103 makes settings for ending a special game state such as a probability change state or a time saving state. For example, the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are reset (turned off), and the count of the time reduction counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 to count the remaining number of variable displays (time reduction remaining number) executed during the time reduction state. The process of setting the count value of the time saving counter for counting the value to "0" is performed. Then, the timer value corresponding to the fanfare waiting time (the waiting time from the start to the end of the fanfare in the big hit game state, which is a predetermined time) is set in the game control process timer as the initial value. Then, "16" is set as an initial value in the round number counter for counting the round games provided in the RAM 102. After that, set to send the hit start specification command and the game state specification command that specifies the current game state (here, the command that specifies the normal state), and update the special figure process flag to "4". The special symbol stop process is terminated. Since the game state is changed after the big hit game state, it is not necessary to send the game state specification command here.

When the big hit flag is in the off state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is in the on state, and when the small hit flag is in the on state, the effect waiting time at the start of the small hit (small). It is a waiting time until the execution of the effect corresponding to the start of the winning game state is started, which is a predetermined time), and the small hit based on the special figure display result being "small hit". Set the transmission of the small hit start designation command (effect control command), which is a control command to specify the start of the game state, and update the special figure process flag to "8". On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

Subsequently, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to end the special game state such as the probability change state or the time saving state. For example, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag is in the ON state, and if the time saving flag is in the ON state, the count value of the time saving number counter is subtracted by "1". It is determined whether or not the count value after subtracting "1" is "0", and if the count value is "0", the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied (that is, the time saving). Since the variable display of a predetermined number of times that can be executed in the state has been executed), the time saving flag is turned off in order to end the time saving state. After that, the transmission setting for transmitting the game state specification command (here, the command for specifying the high accuracy and low base state) is made based on the current game state, and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this jackpot opening pre-processing, for example, the timer value of the game control process timer is subtracted by 1. If the timer value after subtraction is not "0", it means that the fanfare waiting time has not yet elapsed, so that the jackpot opening pre-processing ends. When the timer value after subtraction is "0", the fanfare waiting time has elapsed and it is the start timing of the round game. In this case, a process of starting the execution of the round game in the jackpot game state to open the big winning opening (for example, a process of transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door), a big winning opening A process of setting a timer value corresponding to the upper limit of the period in which the door is open (29 seconds in this case) in the game control process timer is executed. The value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5" when a process such as opening the large winning opening is executed. By repeating step S114 each time a timer interrupt occurs, waiting until the start timing of the round game (waiting until the end of the fanfare), opening of the big winning opening, and the like are realized.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this jackpot opening process, a process of subtracting 1 from the timer value of the game control process timer, a timer value after 1 subtraction, and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 in one round game (switch). The grand prize opening is opened from the open state to the closed state (or one) based on a counter (provided in the RAM 102) or the like that counts 1 each time the count switch 23 is determined to be on in the process. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return to the open state.

When it is determined that the timer value after subtracting 1 becomes 0, or the number of detected game balls (count value of the counter) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 9), the large winning opening is opened. Since it is time to close, the process of returning the large winning opening to the closed state (for example, the process of stopping the transmission of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door and turning off the solenoid 82) The process of setting the timer value corresponding to the closing period of the big prize opening (the interval period of the round game, which is a preset period) in the game control process timer, the process of decrementing the count value of the round number counter, etc. Will be executed. If the timer value after subtracting 1 does not become 0 and the number of detected game balls does not reach the predetermined number, the process of maintaining the large winning opening open (for example, the solenoid drive signal). The process of continuing the supply) is performed, and the process of opening the jackpot is completed. When the grand prize opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6". By repeating step S115 each time a timer interrupt occurs, the open state of the large winning opening is maintained until the timing of returning the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this jackpot release post-processing, processing for determining whether or not the count value of the round number counter has become "0", processing for decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 when it has not become "0", and the like are performed. Will be done.

If it is determined that the count value of the round number counter is "0", it means that the round game has reached the upper limit number of times, so that the game control process timer has an ending waiting time (start of the ending in the big hit game state). The timer value corresponding to the waiting time from to the end, which is a predetermined time) is set in the game control process timer. In addition, a setting is made to send a hit end specification command, and a process of updating the special figure process flag to "7" is also performed.

When the timer value of the game control process timer is decremented by 1, it is determined whether the timer value after decrementing by 1 is 0. If it is not 0, it is not the start timing of the round game, so the closed state. Is maintained, and the post-processing after opening the jackpot ends. If it is 0, it is the start timing of the round game, so the timer value corresponding to the process of opening the large winning opening and the upper limit of the period of opening the large winning opening (29 seconds in this case). Is executed in the game control process timer. The value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5" when a process such as opening the large winning opening is executed.

Each round game is realized by repeatedly executing S115 and S116 after the large winning opening is opened in step S114 each time a timer interrupt occurs.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a process of decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 is performed. If the timer value subtracted by 1 is not 0, the ending has not been completed, and the jackpot end processing is terminated as it is. When the timer value subtracted by 1 becomes 0, the ending ends, so the time reduction flag, time reduction count counter, probability change flag, etc. are used according to the jackpot type (big hit type buffer setting value) stored in the jackpot type buffer. Set the state of.

For example, if the jackpot type is "probability change", the time saving flag and the probability change flag are turned on, and "100" is set as the count initial value in the time saving number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102. If the jackpot type is "non-probability change", only the time saving flag is turned on, and "100" is set as the initial count value in the time saving number counter. If the jackpot type is "probability", only the probability change flag is turned on. In the jackpot end process, after such settings, transmission settings are made to send a game status specification command that specifies the game status according to the settings, and various data such as the game control process timer and the jackpot type buffer setting value (next). The value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" by appropriately resetting (what you do not want to carry over to the variable display of).

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. In this small hit opening pre-processing, the variable display result is "small hit", and it is time to open the large winning opening (for example, the small hit start production waiting time set above). The process of opening the large winning opening and the process of starting the measurement of the elapsed time from the open state are included based on the above. Further, in the small hit opening preprocessing, for example, the upper limit of the period for keeping the big winning opening open is "0.5 seconds" as in the case where the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability". By setting such as ", the setting for the small hit game state is made. When the process of opening the large winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9". By repeatedly executing step S118, the state is controlled to the standby state until the large winning opening is opened.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, a large prize is won based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the large winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process of determining whether or not it is time to return the mouth from the open state to the closed state (or it may be partially open), and the timing to return the grand prize opening from the open state to the closed state (of the game ball) Processing to return the large winning opening to the closed state when it is determined that the number of pieces reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces) or the elapsed time reaches the upper limit period set in step S118). Etc. are included. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the process of determining whether or not the number of times of opening has reached the predetermined upper limit, and the timing of returning the large winning opening to the closed state when the upper limit has not been reached. A process of measuring the elapsed time from the beginning, a process of opening the large winning opening again when the measured elapsed time reaches a preset time, and the like are executed. When the number of times the large winning opening has been opened reaches the upper limit, a setting is made to send a small hit end specification command, which is a control command for notifying that the small hit game state has ended, and the value of the special figure process flag is "10". Is updated to. The command set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the above-mentioned command control process after the special symbol process process is completed. The small hit game state is realized by repeatedly executing step S118 and repeatedly executing step S119.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hit end process, there is a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed by the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. It includes a process of waiting until the elapse (the small hit end process is terminated until the elapse of the waiting time). Here, when the small hit game state ends, the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag is not changed, and the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

Next, the main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described.

In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute a predetermined effect control main process. When the effect control main process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Set the register of the circuit). After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) is turned on. The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, it waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, a control signal that serves as an effect control command is selected from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. To capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

When the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off, and command analysis processing is executed. In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Settings and controls corresponding to are performed.

After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process process is executed. In the effect control process processing, for example, various operations such as display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting operation in the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the like. Regarding the control content of the effect operation using the effect device, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11. Following the effect control process process, the effect random number update process is executed, and the software updates the numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the RAM 122 as various random number values used for the effect control. After that, the determination of whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on is executed again.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning command (start winning opening designation command, special figure hold storage number designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command) from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not it was present (step S401).

When it is determined that the start winning command has been received (step S401; Yes), the received command is stored in the starting winning command buffer (step S402). When the first start winning opening designation command or the first special figure hold storage number designation command is received as the start winning command, the start winning command (first start winning opening designation command, first special figure hold storage number designation command) , The symbol determination result specification command, the variation pattern determination result specification command) are stored in the first start winning command buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. When a second start winning opening designation command or a second special figure hold storage number designation command is received as a start winning command, a start winning command (second start winning opening designation command, second special figure hold storage number designation command) , The symbol determination result specification command, the variation pattern determination result specification command) are stored in the second start winning command buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122.

FIG. 15A is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of winning the first start. In the first start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the starting winning command received at the time of the first starting winning is stored. The command buffer at the time of winning the first start corresponds to each of the storage areas (hold display numbers 1 to 4) capable of storing various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the first special figure hold storage number. Area to be used) is provided.

When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening, 4 commands, 1st starting winning opening designation command, 1st special figure hold memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and variation pattern judgment result designation command, are 1 The set effect control command (command at the time of starting winning) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, in addition to these first start winning opening designation command, first special figure hold memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command, and other information are held. A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in association with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data for specifying the start winning command from the beginning of the free area of the first start winning command buffer according to the reception order. The free area of the command buffer at the time of winning the first start, that is, the data in the area where the data is not stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum hold display number in which the storage area of the start winning command is "0000 (H)" in the first start winning command buffer. Each effect control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the first start winning opening designation command, the first special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command.

Further, the command buffer at the time of the first start winning is provided with a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the hold display numbers, and a storage area for storing the corresponding display change pattern described later. .. The corresponding display change pattern is a type indicating a change (transition) in the display mode (display color) of the hold display and the active display. As shown in FIG. 15A, when the corresponding display change pattern is "0", the hold notice effect is not executed, so that the display mode (display color) of the hold display and the active display is the normal mode (white). It will not change as it is. Further, the first start winning command buffer is provided with a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the hold display numbers, and a storage area for storing the action effect pattern described later. The action effect pattern is a pattern of the effect effect mode that is executed before the display mode of the corresponding display such as the hold display and the active display changes when the hold notice effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 15A, when the action effect pattern is “0”, the action effect other than the action effect of Gase is not executed.

Further, FIG. 15B is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of winning the second start. In the second start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the starting winning command received at the time of the second starting winning is stored. The command buffer at the time of winning the second start corresponds to each of the storage areas (hold display numbers 1 to 4) capable of storing various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the second special figure hold storage number. Area to be used) is provided.

When there is a start prize to the 2nd start winning opening, 4 commands: 2nd starting winning opening designation command, 2nd special figure hold memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and variation pattern judgment result designation command are 1 The set effect control command (command at the time of starting winning) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, in addition to these second start winning opening designation command, second special figure hold memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command, and other information are held. A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in association with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data for specifying the start winning command from the beginning of the free area of the second start winning command buffer according to the reception order. The free area of the command buffer at the time of winning the second start, that is, the data in the area where the data is not stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum hold display number in which the storage area of the start winning command is all "0000 (H)" in the second start winning command buffer. Each effect control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the second start winning opening designation command, the first special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command.

Further, in the second start winning command buffer, similarly to the first starting winning command buffer, a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the hold display numbers is provided, and a corresponding display change pattern described later is provided. A storage area for storing is provided. "PT4-X-X" is stored in the display change pattern corresponding to the hold display number "4" shown in FIG. 15 (B), and the hold notice effect is provided for the hold display corresponding to the hold display number "4". Indicates that is executed. Further, the command buffer at the time of winning the second start is provided with a storage area for storing the action effect pattern.

Returning to the description of the flowchart of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 14, after executing step S402, or when it is determined that the command at the time of starting winning is not received (step S401; No), the effect control CPU 120 is a game. It is determined whether or not the status specification command has been received (step S403). When it is determined that the game state designation command has been received (step S403; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 switches the on / off state of the high accuracy flag and the high base flag based on the content of the received game state designation command. (Step S404).

The high-probability flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) and is turned on in response to the probable change state, and is a probabilistic flag on the main board 11 side. The on / off state is switched according to the switching of the on state / off state. The high base flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) and is turned on in response to the time saving state, and is a time saving flag on the main board 11 side. The on / off state is switched according to the switching of the on state / off state. For example, when the game state specification command specifies the high accuracy high base state (for example, when the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are specified to be on), the effect control CPU 120 has a high accuracy flag and a high accuracy flag. Turn both of the base flags on (if they are already on, keep them on. The same applies to the on / off states for both flags). When the game state specification command specifies the high probability low base state (for example, when the probability variation flag is on and the time saving flag is off), the high probability flag is turned on and the high base is set. Turn off the flag. When the game state specification command specifies the low probability low base state (normal state) (for example, when the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are specified to be off), both the high probability flag and the high base flag are used. Turn it off.

After executing step S404, or when it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S403; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes other analysis processing (step S405), and the command analysis processing To finish.

Here, with reference to FIG. 16, a process executed in response to the reception of each effect control command in the command analysis process will be described. The content shown in the item of "process content" shown in FIG. 16 is, for example, the process executed in step S405. Further, the step number shown in the item of "process content" indicates the step number in the flowchart shown in FIG. 14, and means that the corresponding step process is executed. Further, each reception flag and each storage area shown in the item of "processing content" are provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Also, setting the receive flag means turning it on.

For example, when the received effect control command is a variation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variation pattern command reception flag.

Further, for example, when the received effect control command is a display result specification command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 17, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the hold display setting process (step S161).

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the hold display setting process. When the hold display setting process shown in FIG. 18 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a start winning command has been received (step S501). When it is determined that the start winning command has been received (step S501; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the received start winning command is the first hold storage number addition designation command received in the low base state, or the high. It is determined whether or not it is one of the second hold storage number addition designation commands received in the base state (step S502). In this embodiment, by executing the process of step S502, the hold notice effect can be executed when the hold memory increases based on the winning of the first start winning opening 13 in the low base state, and in the high base state. When the hold memory increases based on the winning of the second start winning opening 14, the hold notice effect can be executed. In this embodiment, for example, when the hold notice effect is already being executed, it is controlled so that the hold notice effect is not further executed by determining No in S502.

When it is determined that either the first start winning opening designation command received in the low base state or the second starting winning opening designation command received in the high base state (step S502; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 Determines whether or not the number of holds (the number of first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold memory) has become 3 or more due to this winning (step S503). In step S503, it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is 3 or more in the low base state, and whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number is 3 or more in the high base state. Good. The number of holds is as follows: when the first start winning opening designation command is received in step S502, the first special figure hold storage number designation command is received, and when the second start winning opening designation command is received, the number is second. 2 It may be specified by referring to the special figure hold storage number specification command.

When it is determined that the number of holds is 3 or more (step S503; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 has a final display mode (final display mode) of the corresponding display such as a hold display and an active display, and a final display mode. The corresponding display change pattern, which is a pattern of the effect (holding notice effect) that gradually changes the display mode of the corresponding display, is determined (step S504). That is, in this embodiment, the hold notice effect is executed when the number of holds is 3 or more. In step S504, a pattern that does not change the display mode of the corresponding display is also determined, and the hold notice effect may not be executed when the number of holds is 3 or more. Even when the second hold storage number addition specification command received in the high base state is received, the high base state (time saving state) ends before the target fluctuates and becomes the low base state. May not execute the hold notice effect.

Even when the number of holds is less than 3, the hold notice effect may be executed. In addition, a plurality of hold notice effects may be executed in parallel.

Further, in this embodiment, a notice effect (hold notice effect) in which the display modes of the hold display and the active display change is executed, but only in the hold display or in the active display. , A notice effect that changes the display mode may be executed. Then, the present invention may be applied to such a notice effect.

In step S504, first, the final display mode of the corresponding display is determined. For example, according to the variable display result and the variation pattern of the variable display, the corresponding display (active display) is performed at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 19 with reference to the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 19 stored in advance in the predetermined area of the ROM 121. ), The final display mode is determined. The effect control CPU 120 may acquire the variable display result and the variation pattern of the variable display by referring to the symbol determination result designation command and the variation pattern determination result specification command included in the start winning command.

Next, the determination of the final display stage of the hold display will be specifically described. The final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 19 is a table for predetermining the final display mode (final display mode) of the change (transition) of the corresponding display in the hold notice effect. As shown in FIG. 19, the final display mode determination table sets the final display mode (display color) to "white", "blue", "green", and "" for each variable display result (including jackpot type and variation pattern). A decision ratio is assigned to determine whether to use "red" or "rainbow". More specifically, the variable display result is classified into "big hit (16R)", "big hit (probability)", "loss (super reach)", and "other than the above", and each is prepared as a final display mode. Different decision ratios are assigned to "white", "blue", "green", "red", and "rainbow".

“White” in FIG. 19 is a display mode (normal mode) when the hold notice effect is not executed. That is, in FIG. 19, when the final display mode is determined to be "white", the hold notice effect is not executed (the display mode of the corresponding display does not change). “Blue”, “green”, “red”, and “rainbow” in FIG. 19 are display modes (notice modes) when the hold notice effect is executed. The timing at which the display mode changes is the timing at which a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the hold was placed and the hold display was shifted (after the fluctuation started), or after the hold display was shifted to the active display. It is the timing when the predetermined time has passed. The timing at which the display mode changes is not limited to these, and may be any timing during the fluctuation or at the end of the fluctuation. For example, as the change timing, when the change starts, before each decorative symbol stops (during high-speed fluctuation), when each decorative symbol stops, when it reaches reach, and when it develops into super reach (multiple display during hold display or active display). (Timing), during the reach production of Super Reach, etc. Further, the operation means such as the push button 31B may be changed in response to the operation, and in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo-ream, it changes at each re-variation of the pseudo-ream and during each re-variation. It may be the timing.

In the hold notice production, the percentage of big hits (big hit reliability) and the percentage of super reach (super reach reliability) are high in the order of "rainbow"> "red"> "green"> "blue", and the big hit The degree of advantage of is also high. Further, when the display mode is "rainbow", it is confirmed that the 16R jackpot will be achieved. In this embodiment, the display color of the display mode of the corresponding display is changed in the hold notice effect, but the shape, size, pattern, and the like may be changed.

In addition, when the display mode is "rainbow", it is determined that it will be a big hit, but it is not necessary to confirm that it will be a big hit. In addition, the jackpot including the sudden probability may be fixed. The determination ratio of the final display mode may be arbitrary as long as it can be notified that the display mode is likely to be advantageous to the player.

In step S504, after the final display mode is determined with reference to the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 19, the specific display mode in the hold notice effect is determined based on the determined final display mode and the number of holds. Determine the corresponding display change pattern corresponding to the change. Specifically, the corresponding display change pattern determination table for determining the corresponding display change pattern is selected according to the determined final display mode and the number of reservations. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, nine types of corresponding display change pattern determination tables 1 to 9 are prepared according to the final display mode and the number of reservations. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of corresponding display change patterns in which the change timing and the change stage (display mode in the middle) are set in advance so as to finally change to the final display mode are provided. It is determined to be one of a plurality of types of corresponding display change patterns.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a corresponding display change pattern determination table 7 selected when the final display mode is “red” and the number of reservations is “4” as an example of the corresponding display change pattern determination table. As shown in FIG. 21, in the corresponding display change pattern determination table 7, there are a plurality of types in which the display mode (display mode) in the hold display number 3, the hold display number 2, the hold display number 1, and the active display is defined at the time of winning. Corresponding display change pattern of is set. At the time of winning, it is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the corresponding display change pattern, and when it shifts to each hold display number and active display, if it becomes a different display mode, it changes to the display mode corresponding to the corresponding display change pattern. ..

For example, in the corresponding display change pattern PT4-4-1 in the corresponding display change pattern determination table 7, the hold display is displayed in "white" at the time of winning, and the corresponding display change pattern changes to "red" when shifting to the active display. Is. Corresponding display change pattern PT4-4-21 displays the hold display in "blue" at the time of winning, changes to "green" when shifting to the hold display number 1, and changes to "red" when shifting to the active display. It is a changing corresponding display change pattern. It may be determined to be one of a plurality of types of corresponding display change patterns. Although the determination ratio is not shown in FIG. 21, it may be determined at random. For example, the corresponding display change pattern may be determined based on the variable display result. For example, various reliability (big hit reliability, reach reliability, advantage of big hit) may be different depending on the number of changes and the change timing. By doing so, the player pays attention not only to the final display mode but also to the number of changes and the timing of changes. The determined correspondence display change pattern is stored in the correspondence location in the start winning command buffer shown in FIG.

In the corresponding display change pattern determination table 7 shown in FIG. 21, the number of changes is shown in each corresponding display change pattern. The action effect pattern described later is determined according to the number of changes.

Here, only the corresponding display change pattern determination table 7 is shown, but in the other corresponding display change pattern determination tables, if a plurality of types of corresponding display patterns are set and one of them is determined. Good. As shown in FIG. 20, since the corresponding display change pattern determination table 1 is a table selected when the final display mode is "white", it remains "white" from the time of winning to the active display. Only the corresponding display change pattern is set.

After determining the final display mode and the corresponding display change pattern in step S504, the action effect pattern is determined (step S505). In this embodiment, when the hold notice effect is executed, the effect image (action effect image) moves with respect to the hold display after the shift display is performed due to the digestion of the hold memory. The effect effect on which the effect image acts (interferes) is executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the display mode may change as a result of the effect. By doing so, the player pays attention to the action production, and the interest of the game is improved.

In this embodiment, the action effect A and the action effect B are executed as the action effect. When the action effect B is executed, the display mode of the hold display is surely changed, and when the action effect A is executed, the hold display may not change. That is, it is possible to execute the action effect A (action effect A Gase) of the Gase that only arouses the expectation of the player. In this embodiment, the action effect A is an effect in which the image of the bomb acts on the hold display or the active display, and the action effect B is an effect in which the image of the arrow acts on the hold display or the active display. The effect mode of the action effect is not limited to this, and may be any effect mode. The action effect A Gase is also referred to as a suggestion effect suggesting that the corresponding display changes to a display mode at a stage with a higher degree of expectation.

In this embodiment, when the action effect B is executed, the display mode of the hold display is surely changed, but the display mode of the hold display may not change with a low probability. It may be (there may be an action effect B ghost). For example, the display mode of the hold display may be changed with a higher probability when the action effect B is executed than when the action effect A is executed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22, a plurality of types of action effect patterns corresponding to which action effect is to be executed at each stage (hold display number, active display) according to the number of changes in the corresponding display. Is provided. As shown in FIG. 22, 14 types of action effect patterns in which the action effect A and the action effect B are combined are provided according to the number of changes. In step S505, any action effect pattern may be determined according to the number of changes in the corresponding display change pattern determined in step S504. For example, in step S504, when the action effect pattern PT4-4-1 shown in FIG. 21 is determined, the number of changes is one, so the action effect pattern STP1-1 or STP1-2 is determined. When the action effect pattern PT4-4-21 shown in FIG. 21 is determined, the number of changes is two, so the action effect pattern STP2-1 to STP2-4 is determined. When the action effect pattern PT4-4-41 shown in FIG. 21 is determined, the number of changes is three, so it is determined to be one of the action effect patterns STP3-1 to STP3-8. The determined action effect pattern is stored in the corresponding portion in the command buffer at the time of starting winning.

Although the determination ratio is not shown in FIG. 22, it may be determined at random. For example, the action effect pattern may be determined based on the variable display result. For example, various reliability (big hit reliability, reach reliability, advantage of big hit) may be different depending on the number of appearances of the action effect A or the action effect B. By doing so, the player pays attention not only to the final display mode but also to which action effect is executed.

Further, the determination ratio of the action effect pattern may be different according to the determined corresponding display change pattern. For example, even if the number of changes and the final display mode are the same and the corresponding display change pattern is used, the determination ratio of the action effect may be different depending on the number of change stages. Specifically, if the pattern changes in the order of "white-> white-> green-> green-> red", the first change changes two steps, and the next change changes one step. Make it easier to determine the action effect pattern that is the effect A. In addition, if the pattern changes in the order of "white-> blue-> blue-> red-> red", the first change changes one step, and the next change changes two steps, so action effect A-> action effect B. It may be easy to determine the action effect pattern (or the action effect A and the action effect B may be reversed). By doing so, the rate of change in multiple stages can be made different depending on the type of action effect, and the player pays attention to which action effect is executed, and the interest of the game is enhanced. improves.

In the action effect pattern shown in FIG. 22, the number of times the action effect B is executed is shown in each action effect pattern. In this embodiment, the effect corresponding to the remaining number of times of the action effect B is executed. Details will be described later.

In this embodiment, the action effect is executed at least for the number of changes in the corresponding display. In other words, the action effect is executed whenever the display mode of the corresponding display changes. Not limited to this, the display mode of the corresponding display may change without the action effect.

Returning to the description of the hold display setting process shown in FIG. 18, in the process of step S502, the first start winning opening designation command received in the low base state and the second starting winning opening designation command received in the high base state. If it is determined that neither is the case (step S502; No), or if it is determined in step S503 that the number of holds is less than 3 (step S503; No), the hold notice effect is not executed, so from the time of winning to the active display. The corresponding display change pattern that does not change while remaining “white” is determined (step S506). Here, "0" corresponding to not executing the hold notice effect is stored in the corresponding portion in the start winning command buffer shown in FIG.

After executing the process of step S505 or S506, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first hold display unit of the display screen of the image display device 5 according to the corresponding display change pattern determined in the process of step S505 or step S506. The corresponding display (first hold display or second hold display) is additionally displayed on the 5HL or the second hold display unit 5HR (step S509).

After executing the process of step S509, or when it is determined in the process of step S501 that the start winning command has not been received (step S501; No), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the variation start designation command. Is determined (step S510). Whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the fluctuation start designation command by referring to whether or not either the first fluctuation start designation command reception flag or the second fluctuation start designation command reception flag is set, for example. It may be judged whether or not. When it is determined that the fluctuation start designation command has not been received (step S510; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the hold display setting process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start designation command has been received (step S510; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received fluctuation designation command is the second fluctuation start designation command (step S512). .. When it is determined that the received fluctuation start designation command is not the second fluctuation start designation command, that is, the received fluctuation start designation command is the first fluctuation start designation command (step S512; No), the image display device 5 is the first. 1 In the hold display unit 5HL, the hold display of the hold display number of the hold display number "1" is deleted and displayed as an active display on the variable display compatible display unit AHA, and each of the commands corresponding to "2" to "4" is displayed. 1 The display position of the hold display is moved (shifted) to the right one by one (step S513).

After executing the process of step S513, the effect control CPU 120 erases the stored contents of the hold display number "0" (active display) in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, and the hold display numbers "1" to "4". The stored contents corresponding to "" are shifted one by one (step S514). After executing the process of step S514, the hold display setting process ends.

When it is determined in the process of step S512 that the received variation designation command is the second variation start designation command (step S512; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is used in the second hold display unit 5HR of the image display device 5. The hold display of the hold display number of the hold display number "1" is deleted, the display unit AHA for variable display is displayed as an active display, and the display position of each second hold display corresponding to "2" to "4" is set. It is moved (shifted) to the left one by one (step S518).

After executing the process of step S518, the effect control CPU 120 erases the stored contents of the hold display number "0" (active display) in the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, and the hold display numbers "1" to "4". The stored contents corresponding to "" are shifted one by one (step S519). After executing the process of step S519, the hold display setting process ends.

Returning to the description of the flowchart of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 17, after executing the hold display setting process in step S161, the effect control CPU 120 is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit). One of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 is selected and executed according to the value of the process flag (initially "0").

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In this variable display start waiting process, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started based on whether or not the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command from the main board 11 is received. It includes a process for determining whether or not to do so. When the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command is received and it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1". Will be done.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbol in the image display device 5. In order to perform variable display of the above and other various effect operations, it includes processing for determining a fixed decorative pattern and various effect control patterns according to a variation pattern of a special symbol and a type of display result. The variable display start setting process ends when the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control timer setting unit), and the effect control determined in step S171. Various control data are read from the pattern, and various effect controls are performed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display stop process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The variable display stop process includes a process of determining whether the variable display result notified by the display result designation command is a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "loss". Then, when the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit", the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", while when the variable display result is "miss", the effect is produced. The process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to "0".

The special figure hit waiting process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received, the hit start designation command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, and the jackpot type specified by the display result designation command received before that is "probability change". Or, if it is "non-probability change", the value of the effect process flag is updated to "6". If the hit start specification command specifies the start of the small hit game state, or the hit start specification command specifies the start of the big hit game state, and the display result specification command received before that is specified. If the jackpot type specified by is "probability", the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5". In addition, when the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command (when the hit start designation command reception waiting time elapses), it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0".

The short-term opening process of the large winning opening in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this processing at the time of opening the large winning opening for a short period of time, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state or the small hit game state of "probability", and the effect image based on the set content. Is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and the command (electricity) to the lamp control board 14 is output. Various effect controls (big hits and small hits have occurred) in the "probable" big hit game state or small hit game state, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output of the decoration signal). For example, the effect control for notifying the image display device 5) is executed. Further, in the short-term opening processing of the big winning opening, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to the reception of the big hit end designation command or the small hit end designation command from the main board 11. Update to "7".

The process when the large winning opening is normally opened in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this process when the large winning opening is normally opened, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state of "probability change" or "non-probability change", and the effect image based on the setting content. Is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the command (electricity) to the lamp control board 14 is output. Various effect controls (for example, that a big hit has occurred) in a "probable change" or "non-probable change" big hit game state, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output of the decoration signal). , Including the effect control to be notified by the image display device 5). Further, in the process when the large winning opening is normally opened, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, in response to receiving the jackpot end designation command from the main board 11. Update.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, and displays the effect image based on the set contents in the display area of the image display device 5. By outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, a game effect is achieved. Various effect controls at the end of the jackpot game state, such as turning on / off / blinking the lamp 9 and the decorative LED, are executed. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0".

Subsequently, the details of the action effect in this embodiment will be described. As described above, in this embodiment, the action effect A and the action effect B can be executed. The action effect A is an effect in which the image of the bomb acts on the corresponding display. The action effect A includes an action effect A case in which the hold display does not change.

On the other hand, in the action effect B, after the image of the arrow corresponding to the action effect B is once displayed on the image display device 5, the image of the arrow becomes the corresponding display until the corresponding display of the notice target is erased. It is a production that works. That is, when the image of the arrow is displayed on the image display device 5, the execution of the action effect B is in stock. As described above, the effect of stocking (suggesting) the execution of the action effect B (displaying the image of the arrow) is also referred to as a notification effect notifying that the action effect B will be executed in the future. In addition, a plurality of action effects B can be stocked. That is, a plurality of arrow images may be displayed. Then, when the action effect B is executed, the hold display always changes, so that the player can change the number of times and the minimum corresponding display depending on the number of stocked (displayed) arrow images. It is possible to grasp the stage (display mode) in which the limit changes. For example, if the display color of the current corresponding display is "blue" and two arrow images are stocked, it can be recognized that the action effect B is executed at least twice, and the change is at least two steps. It can be understood that it becomes "red". By executing such an action effect B and a notification effect, the player comes to pay attention to these effects, and the interest is improved.

As described above, in this embodiment, since it is possible to execute a plurality of notification effects (the action effect B is a plurality of stocks) in one corresponding display (1 hold notice effect), it depends on the number of the notification effects. It becomes possible to recognize to what stage the correspondence display changes, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, the display mode of the corresponding display may change in a plurality of steps. That is, it may change in a plurality of stages in response to the action effect of 1 and the notification effect of 1. As a result, the player expects to change in more stages in response to the action effect of 1 and the notification effect of 1, and the interest of the game is improved.

The notification effect may be executed one by one, or the corresponding display may be changed step by step.

It should be noted that the effect mode (displayed image) of the action effect A and the action effect B is an example, if the action effect A is an action effect with a ghost effect, and the action effect B is an action effect accompanied by a notification effect. Good. Further, the effect mode of the effect of stocking the action effect B (notification effect) is an example, and any effect may be used as long as it can indicate that the action effect B is stocked.

In the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. 17, the action effect setting process for determining the number of executions of the notification effect and whether or not to execute the action effect A Gase is executed. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the action effect setting process. In the action effect setting process shown in FIG. 23, first, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the corresponding display change pattern stored in the start winning command buffer (first start winning command buffer or second starting winning command buffer). By doing so, it is determined whether or not the corresponding display changes (whether or not an action effect that is not a ghost is executed) in the current fluctuation (step S601).

If the corresponding display changes due to this change (step S601; Yes), whether or not to execute the action effect B in this change by referring to the action effect pattern stored in the command buffer at the time of starting winning. Is determined (step S602). When the action effect B is executed in this variation (step S602; Yes), it is determined whether or not the stock number of the action effect B specified by the stock number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is 0. (Step S603).

If the number of stocks of the action effect B is 0 (step S603; Yes) even though the action effect B is executed in this variation, the effect is inconsistent. Therefore, the action effect B is set to 1 in this variation. It is decided to stock one (execute the notification effect of stocking one arrow) (step S604). In this case, the action effect B is stocked in this variation, and the stocked action effect B is executed.

Further, when the corresponding display does not change due to this change (step S601; No), it is determined whether or not the action effect A Gase is executed (step S605). FIG. 24 shows an example of the determination ratio in step S605. As shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, whether or not the corresponding display changes in the future including this change, which is the current display mode, and the number of stocks of the current action effect B. Depending on the situation, it is decided whether or not to execute the action effect A-gase at different ratios.

In particular, when there is a future change schedule, and the current display mode is the same, when the current number of stocks is large, it is easy to determine that the action effect A gasse is executed at a higher rate than when the current stock number is small. It has become. When the number of stocks of the action effect B is large, the action effect is further executed, and the expectation level is further executed, except when the expectation level changes to the highest "rainbow" depending on the stock number. Players expect it to improve. Therefore, in this embodiment, the larger the number of stocks of the current action effect B (the number of notification effects), the higher the execution frequency of the action effect A gas (suggestion effect), thereby increasing the expectation of the player. It can be effectively fanned and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, regardless of the number of stocks of the current action effect B (the number of notification effects), the execution frequency of the action effect A Gase (suggestion effect) is improved as compared with the case where the notification effect is executed and not executed. You may let it. By doing so, the same effect can be obtained.

If there is no plan to change the correspondence display in the future, the number of stocks will inevitably become 0, but the execution rate of the action effect A Gase is low. In particular, when the current display mode is the highest stage "rainbow", it is restricted so that the action effect A-gase is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the Gase effect from being executed in a situation where the corresponding display does not change any more, and it is possible to prevent the useless effect from being executed and the interest from being lowered. In this embodiment, when the current display mode is the highest stage "rainbow", the action effect A-gase is not always executed, but it is restricted to be executed with a low probability. You may.

In addition, when the highest stage of the hold notice effect is not confirmed as a big hit, an effect such as the action effect A Gase may be executed. In that case, it is the highest stage of the hold notice production, and when the production of Gase is executed, it is sufficient to show that the degree of expectation is higher.

In addition, even if there is no plan to change the corresponding display in the future, the action effect A-gase is executed in the stage of "blue" to "red" than in the case where the current display mode is "white". The percentage is high. By doing so, the expectation of the player can be effectively fueled.

When there is a plan to change the corresponding display in the future, the higher the stage of the current display mode, the easier it is to determine that the action effect A-gase is executed. The higher the stage of the current display mode, the more it is desired to change to the player or a higher stage. Therefore, by setting such a determination ratio, the expectation of the player can be effectively fueled.

In step S605, it may be determined whether or not to execute the action effect A-gase at the determination ratio as described above. The determination result may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (command buffer at the time of starting winning, etc.). The determination ratio shown in FIG. 24 is an example, and can be arbitrarily changed without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

When the action effect B is not executed in the current variation (step S602; No), when the action effect B is executed in the current variation, the stock number of the action effect B is not 0 (step S603; No), or After executing the process of step S605, the effect control CPU 120 determines the number of stocks of the action effect B (the number of notification effects, the number of arrows in the notification effect) (step S606).

FIG. 25 shows an example of the determination ratio of the number of stocks in step S606. As shown in FIG. 25, in step S606, the number of stocks (number of notification effects) this time is determined according to the remaining number of executions of the action effect B. The determination ratio of the number of stocks is an example, and the degree of advantage (big hit reliability, etc.) may be different depending on the number of stocks at one time.

After executing the process of step S604 or S606, the determination result is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (command buffer at the time of starting winning, etc.). Further, the value of the stock number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is updated (step S607). When the process of step S604 is executed, the value of the stock number counter may be added by 1, and when the process of step S606 is executed, the value of the stock number counter may be updated based on the determination result in step S606. .. After that, the action effect setting process is terminated.

It should be noted that the number of times the notification effect is executed and whether or not the action effect A-gase is executed are determined for each change in this way, but when determining the corresponding display change pattern (at the time of winning). For example, the number of executions of the notification effect, the execution timing, and whether or not to execute the action effect A gas may be determined in advance. In addition, the corresponding display change pattern is determined by preparing a corresponding display change pattern in which the number of executions of the notification effect, the execution timing, the presence / absence of the action effect A, and which action effect is to be executed are prepared in advance. Therefore, not only the method of changing the corresponding display but also a series of production modes of the action effect and the notification effect may be determined.

In the variable display effect setting process of step S172 in FIG. 17, an action effect execution process for executing a notification effect, an action effect, and a change in the display mode of the corresponding display (hold notice effect) is executed. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the action effect execution process. In the action effect execution process shown in FIG. 26, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to execute the stock (notification effect) of the action effect B in this variation, and whether or not it is the execution timing of the notification effect. (Step S701). In this embodiment, the notification effect is executed at the timing immediately after the start of the fluctuation (for example, 1 second after the start of the fluctuation). Therefore, in step S701, it may be determined whether or not it is decided to execute the notification effect in steps S604 and S606 of FIG. 23, and whether or not it is 1 second after the start of the fluctuation.

The execution timing of the notification effect is not limited to this, and may be any timing during the fluctuation or the end of the fluctuation. For example, the execution timing of the notification effect is at the start of fluctuation, before the stop of each decorative symbol (during high-speed fluctuation), the stop timing of each decorative symbol, when it reaches reach, and when it develops into super reach (hold display or active display). (Multiple timings in), during the reach production of super reach, etc. may be present. Further, the operation means such as the push button 31B may be executed in response to the operation, and in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo-ream, the pseudo-ream is executed at each re-variation or during each re-variation. It may be the timing.

When the stock of the action effect B (notification effect) is executed and the execution timing of the notification effect is reached (step S701; Yes), the stock of the action effect B (notification effect) is executed (step S702). Specifically, the image display device 5 is made to display an image of an arrow.

When the stock (notification effect) of the action effect B is not executed, when it is not the execution timing of the notification effect (step S701; No), or when the action effect is executed after the process of step S702 is executed. It is determined whether or not it is the execution timing (step S703). The action production referred to here includes the action production of Gase. That is, here, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the action effect A, the action effect B, or the action effect A gasse. In this embodiment, the timing at which a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the corresponding display is shifted (after the fluctuation starts) is the change timing of the display mode. Therefore, the action effect is executed at a specific timing (for example, 4 seconds from the start of fluctuation) before that. In step S703, it may be determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the action effect by determining whether or not it is 4 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. If it is neither the case of executing the action effect nor the execution timing (step S703; No), the action effect execution process is terminated.

When the action effect is executed and it is the execution timing (step S703; Yes), the corresponding action effect is executed (step S704).

Then, when the executed action effect is the action effect B (step S705; Yes), the value of the stock number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is subtracted by 1 (step S706). At this time, the action effect image used in the action effect B is erased from the image display device 5 (the image of the arrow is reduced by one).

When the executed action effect is other than the action effect B (step S; No), or after the processing of step S706, the corresponding display is changed or maintained according to the corresponding display change pattern (step S707). As a result, as a result of the action effect, the display mode of the corresponding display is changed or maintained. After that, the action effect execution process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28, an example of an effect image when the hold notice effect and the action effect are executed will be described.

FIG. 27A shows an image display device 5 in which variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The active display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display during execution. The first hold display H1 to H4 corresponding to the hold display numbers "1" to "4" are displayed on the first hold display unit 5HL. The hold displays H1 to H3 are displayed in a "white" circle, which is a normal mode, and the hold display H4 is displayed in a "blue" circle, which is a notice mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (B), the lost symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the next variable display is started, in step S606 of FIG. 23, when it is determined that one action effect B is to be stocked (to execute the notification effect to stock one arrow), FIG. 27 ( As shown in C), the action effect image SB1 of the arrow is displayed on the image display device 5. At this point, it can be seen that the hold display H3 displayed in "blue" in the notice mode changes to at least "green". The action effect image SB1 of the arrow continues to be displayed until the action effect B is executed. In addition, in order to make it easy to understand that the action effect image SB1 of the arrow is stocked, a display area of the action effect image may be provided or the action effect image may be surrounded by a frame.

Further, when it is determined in step S605 of FIG. 23 to execute the action effect A-gase, as shown in FIG. 27 (D), the action effect in which the bomb action effect image SA1 acts on the hold display H3 is executed. Will be done. Since this effect is a Gase effect, the display mode of the hold display H3 does not change.

After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (E), the lost symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Further, when it is determined that one action effect B is to be stocked (to execute the notification effect to stock one arrow), the action effect image SB2 of the arrow is an image as shown in FIG. 27 (F). It is displayed on the display device 5. At this point, it can be seen that two action effects B are stocked, and the hold display H2 displayed in "blue" in the notice mode changes to "red" which is at least two steps higher.

In this display example, the hold display number 1 and the corresponding display change pattern PT4-4-21 shown in FIG. 21 in which the display mode changes during active display are determined, and the action effect B is executed twice. It shall be decided to do so.

As shown in FIG. 27 (G), during the variable display when the hold display in the notice mode becomes the hold display number 1, the action effect B in which the action effect image SB1 of the arrow acts on the hold display H1 is executed. As shown in FIG. 27 (H), the display mode changes to "green". After that, as shown in FIG. 28 (A), the lost symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Subsequently, when the variable display of the advance notice target is started, as shown in FIG. 28 (B), the action effect B in which the action effect image SB2 of the arrow acts on the active display AH is executed, and in FIG. 28 (C). As shown, the display mode changes to "red". After that, as shown in FIG. 28 (D), for example, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

(Modification example)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and has been described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a structure of parts. In addition, at least a part of each of the following modifications may be combined.

In the above embodiment, when the hold notice effect is executed in step S504 of FIG. 18, after the final display mode is determined based on the table shown in FIG. 19, the corresponding display change pattern determination table and the like shown in FIG. By determining the corresponding display change pattern associated with the display mode and change timing of the corresponding display in each variable display, the entire effect content of the hold notice effect was determined. The method of determining the production content of the hold notice effect is not limited to this, and any determination method may be used. For example, in step S504 of FIG. 18, only the presence / absence of execution of the hold notice effect and the final display mode are determined, and whether or not the action effect is executed each time the variable display is executed, which action effect is executed. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the corresponding display is changed as a result of the action effect. In this case, the action effect (change in the display mode) may be executed so that the book ends match the determined final display mode.

Further, in step S504 of FIG. 18, the display mode and the final display mode at the time of winning are determined, and in each variable display until the variable display of the advance notice target is executed, the display mode is changed or changed when the display mode is changed. The number of stages may be determined based on the level difference (difference in stages) between the display mode at the time of winning and the final display mode. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the change pattern determination process executed in step S504 of FIG. 18 in this case. In this modification, the hold notice effect is also referred to as a predetermined effect. In the change pattern determination process, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode and the final display mode of the corresponding display at the time of winning (step S801). In step S801, for example, according to the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, for example, with reference to the winning and final display mode determination tables shown in FIG. 33, when the corresponding display is won at the determination ratio shown in FIG. The display mode and the final display mode are determined. The table shown in FIG. 33 is a table when the variable display result is a big hit (16R). In addition to this, a table for big hits (probability), super reach loss, other losses, etc. will be prepared. The numerical value in FIG. 33 indicates the determination ratio (%). For example, the determination rate of "white" at the time of winning and "rainbow" as the final display mode is 3%.

Subsequently, the number of change stages in each hold display number is determined based on the level difference from the final display mode (step S802). For example, when the number of holds is 4 at the time of winning, the number of change stages at the four timings of the hold display number 3, the hold display number 2, the hold display number 1, and the active display is determined.

In step S802, the number of change stages at each timing is determined with reference to the change stage number determination table shown in FIG. 34. Here, the level difference is 1 for "white" and "blue", 2 for "white" and "green", 3 for "white" and "red", and 4 for "white" and "rainbow". For example, when the number of holds at the time of winning is 4, and the display mode at the time of winning is "white" and the final display mode is "rainbow", first, in FIG. 34, the level difference 4 and the hold display number 3 With reference to the determination ratio, the number of change stages when the hold display number 3 is reached is determined. Subsequently, the number of change stages when the hold display number 2 is reached is determined by referring to the level difference between the display mode and the final display mode (“rainbow”) in the hold display number 3 and the determination ratio of the hold display number 2. .. Similarly, the number of change stages when the hold display number 1 is reached is determined by referring to the level difference between the display mode and the final display mode (“rainbow”) in the hold display number 2 and the determination ratio of the hold display number 1. , The number of change stages at the time of active display is determined by referring to the level difference between the display mode and the final display mode (“rainbow”) in the hold display number 1 and the determination ratio of the active display.

In this way, since the change stage at each timing is determined based on the level difference from the final display mode, it is not necessary to provide a corresponding display change pattern in advance or a plurality of tables for determining the corresponding display change pattern. The capacity can be reduced and the processing load can be reduced.

After determining the winning display mode, the final display mode, and the number of change stages at each timing as described above, the series of determination results are saved (step S803). After that, the change pattern determination process is terminated.

In the process of step S172 of FIG. 17, the hold notice effect is executed based on the winning display mode, the final display mode, and the change stage at each timing determined in this way.

The process of step S802 in FIG. 32 may be executed at the start of each fluctuation or the like. That is, the display mode at the time of winning and the final display mode may be determined in advance, and the number of change stages may be determined based on the current display mode and the final display mode at the start of each change.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the present invention may be applied to a modified pachinko gaming machine provided with a sub-display device 5S in addition to the image display device 5. In the modified pachinko gaming machine shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, a sub-display device 5S composed of an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like is provided below the image display device 5. The sub-display device 5S may be provided so as to be operable.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, a first hold display unit 5HL, a second hold display unit 5HR, and an active display unit AHA are provided in the sub display device 5S. At least a part of these may be provided in the image display device 5. In the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, as the hold notice effect, an effect accompanied by an action effect in which the images 202 and 203 of the arrows act on the hold display or the active display is executed.

In this modification, as shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to (5), the action effect A executed using only the sub-display device 5S and the image as shown in FIGS. 30 (3) to (5). The action effect B, which is executed by interlocking the display device 5 and the sub display device 5S, can be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 29 (3) to 29 (5), in the hold notice effect accompanied by the action effect A of the modified example, the image 202 of the arrow appears on the sub display device 5S, and the active display (corresponding display may be sufficient). The display mode of the active display changes by hitting.

As shown in FIGS. 30 (3) to 30 (5), in the hold notice effect accompanied by the action effect B of the modified example, the image 203 of the arrow appears in the image display device 5, and the image 203 of the arrow is the sub display device 5S. The display mode of the active display changes by hitting the active display (which may be the corresponding display).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example, the hold notice effect (action effect) using a plurality of display devices can be executed, and the hold notice effect (action effect) becomes various.

Then, which of the action effect A executed by using the sub display device 5S and the action effect B executed by interlocking the image display device 5 and the sub display device 5S changed the corresponding display. The degree of expectation (the degree of advantage of the player) may be different depending on the situation. For example, it may be determined which action effect is to be executed at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 31 according to the variable display result of the advance notice target. In the determination ratio shown in FIG. 31, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot and the super reach reliability are higher when the action effect B is executed than when the action effect A is executed. There is. By doing so, the hold notice effect and the action effect become various, and the effect of these effects is improved.

The sub-display device 5S as the first effect device and the image display device 5 as the second effect device are each composed of an LCD, but an effect device other than the LCD may be used. For example, various effect devices such as a dot display device, a segment display device, an LED, an accessory, a light guide plate, and a movable member may be arbitrarily combined. Further, three or more effect devices may be provided. Further, although it is physically one display device, a part of the display device may be shielded so that it looks like two display devices in appearance.

In this modified example, it is assumed that the display mode of the corresponding display always changes when the action effect is executed, but the display mode of the corresponding display does not change even if the action effect is executed. The production may be performed. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, the action effect may be stockable. That is, the action effect of the modified example may be incorporated into the above embodiment. For example, the action effect A of the above embodiment may be an effect executed by using the sub display device 5S, and the action effect B may be an effect executed by interlocking the image display device 5 and the sub display device 5S. Good. Also in this case, the corresponding display can be displayed by either the action effect A executed by using the sub display device 5S or the action effect B executed by linking the image display device 5 and the sub display device 5S. The degree of expectation (the degree of advantage of the player) may be different depending on whether or not the change has occurred. Further, an action effect C may be provided that is executed in a mode in which the image display device 5, the sub display device 5S, and another effect device (for example, a lamp of a game frame) are interlocked with each other.

Further, in this modification, the case where the action effect B is executed has a higher degree of expectation (reliability for the jackpot and the super reach reliability) than the case where the action effect A is executed, which is advantageous. Although the case where the degree is high is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. This expectation may be a probabilistic jackpot expectation, a pseudo-continuous expectation, or the like. Further, for example, in the case where the action effect B is executed, the ratio of the so-called hold notice effect of Gase may be smaller than in the case where the action effect A is executed, and the game state may be changed. When not notified, the ratio of the internal gaming state being advantageous to the player may be high. On the contrary, the case where the action effect B is executed may be configured so that the degree of advantage is lower than the case where the action effect A is executed.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, even when the action effect (action effect A, action effect B, action effect A Gase) is executed, the stock (notification effect) of the action effect B is executed. Although it has been obtained, the notification effect may not be executed in the variable display in which the action effect is executed. That is, the notification effect may be executed on the condition that the action effect is not executed in this variation. Further, the action effect B is always executed after the stock (notification effect) of the action effect B is executed, but the action effect B may be executed without going through the notification effect. You may. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the action effect setting process (step S171 of FIG. 17) in such a modified example. For the same processing as that of the above embodiment, the same step number is assigned and the description is omitted.

In the action effect setting process in this modification, when the action effect B is executed in the current variation (step S602; Yes), the stock of the action effect B specified by the stock number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is used. It is determined whether or not the number is 1 or more (step S621). When the stock number of the action effect B is 1 or more (step S621; Yes), the value of the stock number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S622), and the action effect setting process is completed. If the number of stocks of the action effect B is 0 (step S621; No), the action effect setting process ends as it is. In this way, when the action effect B is executed by this fluctuation and the number of stocks of the action effect B is 0, the action effect B is directly executed without going through the notification effect. .. When the stock number of the action effect B is 1 or more, the value of the stock number counter is subtracted by 1 in advance in this process, so that the value of the stock number counter is subtracted by 1 when the action effect B is executed (FIG. 26). Step S706) is omitted. In the action effect execution process shown in FIG. 26, if the stock number is determined to be 1 or more, the value of the stock number counter may be subtracted by 1 at that time.

Further, in this modification, when the corresponding display does not change in the current variation (step S601; No), that is, when neither the action effect A nor the action effect B is executed, it is determined whether or not the action effect A gasse is executed (step). S623). Then, only when the action effect (action effect A, action effect B, action effect A Gase) is not executed (step S623; No), the number of stocks of the action effect B is determined (step S606). After executing the process of S606, the determination result is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (command buffer at the time of starting winning, etc.), and the value of the stock number counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is updated according to the determination result. (Step S624). The action effect setting process ends when the action effect A Gase is executed (step S623; Yes) or after the process of step S624 is executed.

According to such a modification, since the notification effect is executed in the fluctuation when the action effect is not executed, the possibility that some effect is executed during the execution of the hold notice effect is increased, and the interest of the hold notice effect is increased. Can be improved.

In the above embodiment, for example, in the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 19, for each variable display result such as "big hit (probability change / non-probability change)", "big hit (probability)", and "loss (super reach)". , The decision ratio assigned to the display stage of the hold display was different. However, the determination ratio assigned to each display color is arbitrary according to the type of variable display and the variable display result. For example, when a "big hit" in which a 16-round game is executed and a "big hit" in which a 4-round game is executed are set as variable display results, the final display mode of the hold display of the "big hit" in which the 4-round game is executed is set. As a result, the determination ratio of "green" or the like may be set higher than the "big hit" in which the 16-round game is executed. Further, when the "big hit" in the time-saving state where the upper limit of the variable display is 100 times and 50 times is set as the variable display result, the final "big hit" hold display in the time-saving state where the upper limit of the variable display is 50 times is set. As a display stage, the determination ratio of "green" or the like may be set higher than the "big hit" in the time saving state where the upper limit of the variable display is 100 times.

In the above embodiment, for example, in the process of step 502 shown in FIG. 18, when the first start winning opening designation command is received in the low base state, or the second starting winning opening designation command is received in the high base state. In that case, the look-ahead notice by the hold notice effect is executed. However, regardless of the received start winning opening designation command, the pre-reading notice by the hold notice effect may be executed only when the game state is either the low base state or the high base state.

In the above embodiment, for example, in the special figure game using the first special figure, as shown in the first special figure display result determination table of FIG. 10A, "big hit", "small hit", "small hit", " In the special figure game using the second special figure with "loss" as the special figure display result, "big hit" and "loss" are the special figures as shown in the second special figure display result determination table of FIG. 10 (B). As the display results, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result was assigned to each of the special figure display results. However, the special figure display result of the special figure game using the first special figure may be limited to "big hit" and "loss", and may not include "small hit". Further, the special figure display result of the special figure game using the second special figure may include "small hit".

In the above embodiment, data may be exchanged with the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the management server, for example, via a mobile terminal having a two-dimensional code reading function and a connection function to the Internet network. The player connects to the management server using a mobile terminal or the like, receives the player's own ID, etc. in advance, and at his / her own choice, receives a notification regarding his / her own performance during the game, or has a past game history. It is possible to play a game in a game mode that reflects the above.

In the above embodiment, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", lighting patterns of each segment not limited to the numbers and symbols, and the like are provided. An example of variable display is shown. However, the variable display result and the variable display special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". It is not limited to those composed of such as. For example, the lighting pattern during the variable display of the special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off, and a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off and one pattern in which at least a part of the LEDs are turned on (for example, a lost symbol). The variable display of the special symbol is also included in the case where the above is alternately repeated (in this case, the one pattern (for example, the lost symbol) appears to blink). Further, the special symbol displayed during the variable display and the special symbol displayed as the variable display result may be different. As a variable display of a special symbol, for example, a display in which "-" is blinked is performed, and as a variable display result, other special symbols ("7" for "big hit", "1" for "missing", etc. ) Is also included in the variable display of special symbols. In addition, the variable display of decorative symbols also includes blinking or scrolling one type of decorative symbol. The lighting pattern during the variable display of the normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off, and a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off and a pattern in which at least a part of the LEDs are turned on (for example, a lost symbol) are included. Alternating repetition is also included in the variable display of normal symbols. Further, the decorative symbol or the ordinary symbol displayed during the variable display may be different from the decorative symbol or the ordinary symbol displayed as the variable display result.

In the above embodiment, the ratio (including the determination ratio and the like; the same applies to the probability) and the like may include 0%. That is, the ratio or probability may be between 0 and 100%. For example, to make one ratio different from the other ratio means that one ratio is, for example, 30%, the other ratio is 70%, one ratio is, for example, 0%, and the other ratio is 100%. Including. Further, the total of one ratio and the other ratio does not have to be 100% (there may be one that is not included in either one or the other and may have a predetermined ratio). Further, when the ratio of the other is higher than the ratio of one, the ratio of one is set to 0% and the ratio of the other is set to 100%. For example, in the above, in order to make the determination ratio of the variable display pattern in a specific period after the advantageous state different from the determination ratio of the variable display pattern in a period other than the specific period, the variable display pattern selected on one side is selected on the other side. This includes cases where there is no such thing and the variable display pattern selected on the one hand and the variable display pattern selected on the other side partially overlap or do not completely overlap. These may be specified by the contents of the table that specifies the ratio.

In the above embodiment, the main side makes a look-ahead judgment and sends a command corresponding to the judgment result to the sub side, but the main side sends a command indicating a random value and makes a look-ahead judgment on the sub side. You may do so.

Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs probability variation control in which the jackpot type is "probability variation" when a jackpot symbol indicating a predetermined number is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the special symbol. For example, a pachinko gaming machine of a probability change determination device type in which probability change control is performed based on the passage of a game ball through a specific area in an attacker provided in the game area may be used.

In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the variation pattern indicating the variation time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, etc., one variation pattern command is issued when the variation is started. Although an example of transmission is shown, the fluctuation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-ream, whether or not there is a slip effect, etc., before reaching (so-called when not reaching). A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop is sent, and the second command is the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. 2 After the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control board 12 may perform effect control in the variation display based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board 12 selects the specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. May be good. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). You may want to send a second command (inclusive). The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command can be reduced.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of a gaming machine, but in the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are used according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, it is applied to the slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible. For example, when applied to a slot machine, the total number of winning combinations such as small winning combinations and replays is counted, and the winning rate is calculated based on the total number of winning winning combinations counted to create a specific effect. May be configured to execute.

In addition, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the game machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, etc., the audio output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decorative LED. Various production operations including the above can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the game machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but a score is scored based on the occurrence of a prize by enclosing the game medium. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that grants.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1. , It may take the form of being distributed by pre-installing it in a storage device such as a computer device in advance. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above and below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

Other gaming machines of the present invention include
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Corresponding display means (for example, 1st hold display part 5HL, 2nd hold display part 5HR, active display part AHA) capable of displaying the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display by any of a plurality of stages of display modes having different expectations.
An effect control that executes the processing of steps S604, S606, and S702 to execute the notification effect that continuously notifies that the corresponding display changes to the display mode at a higher expectation stage for a predetermined period. CPU120) and
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S605 and S704) that executes a suggestion effect suggesting that the corresponding display changes to a display mode at a higher expectation stage.
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, a right frame LED 909c, and operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, microcomputer 90120 for effect control) and
An output means (for example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) that outputs a specific signal for driving an electric component (for example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) according to a control signal by a serial communication method from the control means. The light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter driver 90413a to 90413c) are provided.
The output means sets the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means as the first output state in which the waveform rises according to a predetermined mode (for example, the output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). )) And the second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode of change that is slower than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). It is possible (for example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), it is set to a normal slew rate output, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), it is set to a low slew rate output (FIG. 48). reference)),
The other output means is provided in the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 42, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the control signals are the same. (Sequentially transmitted between the illuminant drivers on the illuminant control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is set to H (high) and the output means is low. (Set to slew rate output state),
When the notification effect is being executed, the suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the notification effect is not executed (for example, in the process of step S605, the determination shown in FIG. 24). A game machine characterized by (determining whether or not to execute the action effect A Gase) can be mentioned.

The above-mentioned gaming machine is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 and pachinko gaming machine 901) that can be variably displayed and controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Corresponding display means (for example, 1st hold display part 5HL, 2nd hold display part 5HR, active display part AHA) capable of displaying the corresponding display corresponding to the variable display by any of a plurality of stages of display modes having different expectations.
An effect control that executes the processing of steps S604, S606, and S702 to execute the notification effect that continuously notifies that the corresponding display changes to the display mode at a higher expectation stage for a predetermined period. CPU120) and
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of steps S605 and S704) that executes a suggestion effect suggesting that the corresponding display changes to a display mode at a higher expectation stage.
Controls electrical components (for example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, a right frame LED 909c, and operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating movable members 9051 to 9054). Control means (for example, microcomputer 90120 for effect control) and
An output means (for example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) that outputs a specific signal for driving an electric component (for example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) according to a control signal by a serial communication method from the control means. The light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the light emitter driver 90413a to 90413c) are provided.
The output means sets the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means as the first output state in which the waveform rises according to a predetermined mode (for example, the output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). )) And the second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode of change that is slower than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). It is possible (for example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), it is set to a normal slew rate output, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), it is set to a low slew rate output (FIG. 48). reference)),
The other output means is provided on another board connected to the board on which the output means is provided via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable or a wire harness) (for example, FIG. 46 (2)). As shown, the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F, and the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F having different control signals. Sequentially transmitted),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 54, in the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, the S terminal is L (low). Is set to the normal slew rate output state),
When the notification effect is being executed, the suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the notification effect is not executed (for example, in the process of step S605, the determination shown in FIG. 24). (Determine whether or not the action effect A Gase is executed by the ratio)
There is also a game machine characterized by this.

According to such a game machine, a sense of expectation can be suitably raised by suggestive production, and the interest is improved. In addition, the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be improved. In addition, if an unintended effect is generated due to noise during the game, the player may feel a sense of discomfort or distrust. However, since the above-mentioned game machine has high noise immunity of the control signal, the occurrence of the unintended effect is high. Can be suppressed with. This leads to the reliability of the game machine. In particular, the corresponding display is one of the places where the player pays particular attention during the game, and since it is possible to highly suppress the occurrence of an unintended display in such a corresponding display, the expectation is raised and the interest is raised. The effect of being able to improve can be further obtained.

Further, examples of the gaming machine capable of increasing the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction include the following gaming machines (a) and (b).
(A) Operating motors 9060A to 9060C for operating a plurality of light emitters and top frame LEDs 909a, left frame LEDs 909b, right frame LEDs 909c, and movable members 9051 to 9054 constituting electric components (for example, light emitting body units 9071 to 9074). ) To control means (for example, a microcomputer 90120 for effect control) and
An output means (for example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving an electric component according to a control signal by a serial communication method from the control means. , Light emitter driver 90411, motor drive driver 90412, illuminant driver 90413a to 90413c).
The output means sets the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means as the first output state in which the waveform rises according to a predetermined mode (for example, the output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). )) And the second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode of change that is slower than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). It is possible (for example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), it is set to a normal slew rate output, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), it is set to a low slew rate output (FIG. 48). reference)),
Other output means are provided in the same substrate as the output means (for example, as shown in FIG. 42, a plurality of light emitter drivers are mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, and the control signals emit the same light emission. (Sequentially transmitted between illuminant drivers on the body control board 9016C),
The output means is set to the second output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 52, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is set to H (high) and the output means is low. A gaming machine characterized in that it is set to a slew rate output state).
(B) Operating motors 9060A to 9060C for operating a plurality of light emitters and top frame LEDs 909a, left frame LEDs 909b, right frame LEDs 909c, and movable members 9051 to 9054 constituting electric components (for example, light emitter units 9071 to 9074). ) To control means (for example, a microcomputer 90120 for effect control) and
An output means (for example, an output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) for driving an electric component according to a control signal by a serial communication method from the control means. , Light emitter driver 90411, motor drive driver 90412, illuminant driver 90413a to 90413c).
The output means sets the output state when the input control signal is output to another output means as the first output state in which the waveform rises according to a predetermined mode (for example, the output state of a normal slew rate (see FIG. 49 (1)). )) And the second output state in which the waveform rises in a mode of change that is slower than the first output state (for example, a low slew rate output state (see FIG. 49 (2))). It is possible (for example, if the S terminal is set to L (low), it is set to a normal slew rate output, and if the S terminal is set to H (high), it is set to a low slew rate output (FIG. 48). reference)),
Another output means is provided on another board connected to the board on which the output means is provided via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable or a wire harness) (for example, shown in FIG. 46 (2)). As described above, the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F, respectively, and the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F having different control signals are sequentially mounted. (Transmitted),
The output means is set to the first output state (for example, as shown in FIG. 54, the S terminal is L (low) in the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F. A gaming machine characterized in that it is set to the normal slew rate output state).
Hereinafter, morphological examples of these gaming machines will be described as other morphological examples.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, other form examples will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 36 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine and shows the layout of the main members. In FIG. 36, the effect movable mechanism 9050, which will be described later, is shown by a broken line. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 901 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 902 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (underframe) 903 that supports and fixes the game board 902. The game board 902 is formed with a game area surrounded by guide rails and having a substantially circular outer edge. A game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device into this game area.

A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 36, the lower right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are each composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode), and are identified in a special symbol game which is an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special symbol"), which is a plurality of types of possible identification information (special identification information), is variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B can variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", respectively. To do. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". ..

A main image display device 905MA is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The main image display device 905MA is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the main image display device 905MA, it corresponds to the variable display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special figure game. In the decorative symbol display area, which is a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each of them, are variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R arranged in the display area of the main image display device 905MA, the corresponding decorative symbols are variably displayed. In this case, in the special symbol game, one of the fluctuation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B is started. , "Left", "Middle", and "Right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the variation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol is variable in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. The final decoration symbol (final stop symbol) that is the display result is stopped and displayed.

As described above, on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B is used. In synchronization with the special figure game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each are variably displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "deriving"). In addition, to derive and display various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means to display identification information such as a decorative symbol as a stop display (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and end the variable display. .. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol becomes "0" and the decoration is displayed. The design may be stagnant and displayed, and may be in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction, for example. Such a display state is also called "temporary stop display", and although the display result in the variable display is not definitively displayed, the player indicates that the change of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display has not progressed. It becomes recognizable. In addition, the temporary stop display does not cause slight shaking or expansion / contraction, and the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed in the period until a short stop time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses. May be included.

The decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese numbers. It may be an English character, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and a character image, and the character image may be, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, or an object other than these. It may be composed of a symbol such as a character or a decorative image showing any other figure). Each of the decorative symbols has a corresponding symbol number. For example, a symbol number of "1" to "8" is assigned to each of the alphanumeric characters indicating "1" to "8". The number of decorative patterns is not limited to eight, and may be any number (for example, seven or nine) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination and a loss combination can be configured.

After the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, until the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right" are displayed. In, for example, scroll display is performed so as to flow from top to bottom in order from the one with the smallest symbol number to the one with the largest symbol number, and when the decorative symbol with the maximum symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed, the process continues. The decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, "1") is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the decorative symbol display area 5L on the "left"), scroll display is performed from the one with the larger symbol number to the one with the smaller symbol number to display the symbol. When the decorative symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative symbol having the largest number may be displayed subsequently.

The decorative symbol is not limited to the one that is variably displayed as a plurality of types of identification information, and the image display device 905 (main image display device 905MA or a sub-image described later) corresponds to the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Any effect image can be displayed on the screen of the display device (905SU, etc.). For example, on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, it may be possible to execute an effect of displaying the result of the story according to the variable display result of the special symbol by displaying the effect image having a story. As an effect by displaying the effect image, for example, a professional wrestling or soccer match or a battle effect in which enemy or ally characters fight may be performed. Then, when the variable display result is "missing", the effect of losing the match or battle is performed. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", the effect of winning the game or battle is performed. Alternatively, for example, on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, the display color change display and the stop display at a specific display portion are repeated. Then, when the variable display result is "missing", the stop display state is maintained with a predetermined display color (for example, white), or the predetermined display color is maintained in a hidden state. Derived display of decorative patterns. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "big hit", the decorative design is derived and displayed by maintaining the stopped display state with a display color (for example, red) different from the predetermined display color. In this way, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, a predetermined (single) symbol may be switched between display and non-display, while the other symbols may be maintained in the non-display state. Then, as the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) that results in the variable display of the decorative symbol, any one of a plurality of types of symbols may be derived and displayed (final stop display). Further, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, the display and non-display of the effect image showing the predetermined pattern may be repeated so that the other effect images are not displayed. Then, as a variable display result of the decorative symbol, the effect image showing the predetermined symbol used for the variable display is not stopped and displayed, and the effect image showing a specific number or symbol different from the predetermined symbol is displayed. By being displayed, the decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

A start winning prize storage display area 905H is arranged on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. In the start winning prize storage display area 905H, a hold storage display is performed in which the number of hold of the variable display (the number of hold of the special figure) corresponding to the special figure game is identifiablely displayed. Here, in the hold of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game, the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B. It occurs based on the starting prize by (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 901 is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is held. Will be done.

For example, due to the occurrence of the first start prize in which the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening, the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A (first start condition). ) Is satisfied, and if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the number of stored first special figures is 1. It is added (incremented), and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, due to the occurrence of the second start prize in which the game ball passes (enters) the second start prize opening, the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B (second start condition). ) Is satisfied, and if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure hold storage number is 1. It is added (incremented), and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the number of stored special figures of the first special figure is decremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1.

The variable display hold storage number obtained by adding the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number is also particularly referred to as a total hold storage number. The term "special figure holding memory number" usually refers to a concept including all of the first special figure holding storage number, the second special figure holding storage number, and the total holding storage number, but in particular, a part of these (for example, for example). It may also refer to the concept of including the number of reserved memories of the first special figure and the number of reserved memories of the second special figure, but excluding the total number of reserved memories).

A display for displaying the number of reserved special figures may be provided together with the start winning prize storage display area 905H or in place of the start winning prize storage display 905H area. In the example shown in FIG. 36, together with the start winning prize storage display area 905H, the first hold for identifiable display of the number of special figure hold storages on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. A display device 9025A and a second hold display device 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the number of first special figure hold storage identifiable. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the number of second special figure hold storage identifiable. The number of the first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B correspond to the upper limit values (for example, "4") of the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number, respectively (for example, 4). It is configured to include (1) LEDs.

On the right side of the main image display device 905MA, a sub image display device 905SU that displays various images including a plurality of types of effect images is provided separately from the main image display device 905MA. The location where the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU are installed is not limited to the vicinity of the center of the game area on the game board 902. For example, the main image display device 905MA is installed near the center of the game area. The sub-image display device 905SU may be installed at any position on the pachinko gaming machine 901, such as outside the gaming area, the upper front surface, the lower front surface, and the side surface of the gaming machine frame 903.

Below the main image display device 905MA, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 906B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9027 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is equipped with a tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a starting area (second starting area) and a second starting winning opening. The normal variable winning ball device 906B closes the second starting winning opening so that the game ball does not pass (enter) by the movable wing piece being in the vertical position. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 9027 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state. ) Make it open.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 39. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. 39. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "" 4 ”) If it is less than or equal to, the first starting condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "" 4 ”) If it is less than or equal to, the second starting condition is satisfied.

A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the ordinary winning ball device 906A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball device 907 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9028 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 39, and a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form a big prize opening as. In the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9028 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening, and the game ball cannot pass (enter) the large winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9028 for the big winning door is on, the big winning door opens the big winning door and the game ball passes through (entering) the big winning door. ) It becomes easier. In this way, the large winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. To do.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the grand prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 9023 shown in FIG. 39. Based on the fact that the game balls are detected by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 907, the game ball passes through another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the large winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 907, the game ball can enter the large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It becomes a disadvantageous second state.

A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 36, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 9020 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The normal pattern (also called "normal figure" or "normal figure") is variably displayed (variable display). Above the normal symbol display 9020, a normal figure hold indicator 9025C is provided to display the number of normal figure hold storage as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 9041.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 may be provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball, a large number of obstacle nails, and a single or a plurality of general winning openings. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

The game board 902 is provided with an effect movable mechanism 9050 as a movable member capable of executing a display effect according to a lighting mode of a plurality of light emitting bodies arranged in an aligned manner. The effect movable mechanism 9050 has a plurality of (for example, four) movable members. The effect movable mechanism 9050 changes into a retracted state in which a plurality of movable members are separately located at the top and bottom of the screen of the main image display device 905MA, and an advanced state in which the plurality of movable members are located in front of the screen of the main image display device 905MA. be able to. In the following description, the up / down / left / right / front / rear directions will be described with reference to the state of facing the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

The effect movable mechanism 9050 shown in FIG. 36 is in the retracted state. In this embodiment, the game area of the game board 902 is formed by a transparent plate (not shown) made of, for example, resin, and the effect movable mechanism 9050 is arranged behind the transparent plate to produce the game ball. It flows down in front of the movable mechanism 9050. However, the present invention is not limited to these examples, and at least one of the plurality of movable members of the effect movable mechanism 9050 may be arranged in front of the transparent plate forming the game area.

FIG. 37 shows a case where a plurality of movable members provided in the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in an advanced state located in front of the main image display device 905MA. FIG. 38 shows an operation example of the effect movable mechanism 9050. The effect movable mechanism 9050 is an upper mechanism having two movable members 9051 and 9052 located on the upper side of the screen of the main image display device 905MA in the retracted state, and 2 located on the lower side of the screen of the main image display device 905MA in the retracted state. It can be separated into a lower mechanism including two movable members 9053 and 9054. That is, the effect movable mechanism 9050 is configured to include an upper mechanism and a lower mechanism that can be arranged apart from each other or close to each other. When the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism are separated from each other, the retracted state is set as the first state. On the other hand, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism are close to each other, the advanced state is set as the second state. The upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are provided with a driving means for changing between a retracted state and an advanced state. The left ends of the movable members 9051 and 9052 are pivotally supported by the decorative member 9057, respectively, and are configured to be rotatable with respect to the decorative member 9057. The decorative member 9057 moves up and down with the operation of the movable member 9051 by outputting the power from the operation motor 9060A shown in FIG. 39 to the movable member 9051.

The movable member 9051 includes a front surface portion and a base body arranged behind the front surface portion, and holds the movable member 9052 between the front surface portion and the base body. The movable member 9052 receives power from the operation motor 9060B shown in FIG. 39 and rotates upward or downward with respect to the movable member 9051. The operation motor 9060B may be attached to the front surface of the base body included in the movable member 9051. The operating motor 9060B provides a driving force for operably driving the movable member 9052. The movable members 9053 and 9054 are connected to a predetermined link mechanism or the like, and the power from the operation motor 9060C shown in FIG. 39 is transmitted via a power transmission unit or the like engaged with the link mechanism to move up and down. While doing so, it can rotate around the left end.

A movable member position sensor 9061 shown in FIG. 39 is provided at a predetermined position of the effect movable mechanism 9050. The movable member position sensor 9061 may be any as long as it can directly or indirectly detect the state of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057. As an example, the movable member position sensor 9061 may be configured to include first to third position sensors provided corresponding to the operating motors 9060A to 9060C. Each of the first to third position sensors is configured by using a photo interrupter, a rotary encoder, or the like, and from the operating states of the corresponding operating motors 9060A to 9060C, for example, the positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057. , The movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 may be detectable. As a specific example, the first position sensor detects the amount of rotation of the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060A, or detects the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060A. It outputs a position detection signal that can specify the operating positions of the movable members 9051 and 9052 and the decorative member 9057. The second position sensor detects the amount of rotation of the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060B, or detects the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060B, so that the movable member is a movable member with respect to the movable member 9051. It outputs a position detection signal that can specify the relative operating position of 9052. The third position sensor detects the amount of rotation of the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060C, or detects the rotation position of the drive gear connected to the rotation shaft of the operation motor 9060C, so that the movable members 9053 and 9054 Outputs a position detection signal that can identify the operating position.

As another example, the movable member position sensor 9061 may be configured to include first to fifth position sensors provided corresponding to the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057, respectively. The first to fourth position sensors are provided corresponding to the movable members 9051 to 9054, and the fifth position sensor is provided corresponding to the decorative member 9057, each of which is a photo interrupter, a linear encoder, or another infrared sensor. Anything that is configured using such as is sufficient. As a result, the first to fifth position sensors may detect the operating states of the corresponding movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057, and output a position detection signal or the like according to the detection result. As described above, the movable member position sensor 9061 may be configured to include a plurality of position sensors provided corresponding to the plurality of movable members.

A plurality of light emitters are aligned and arranged in each of the movable members 9051 and 9052 along a predetermined direction such as a vertical and horizontal direction (vertical and horizontal directions). The plurality of light emitters aligned and arranged by the movable member 9051 constitutes the light emitter unit 9071 among the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 shown in FIG. 39. The plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with the movable member 9052 constitute 90 of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 shown in FIG. 39. As described above, the movable members 9051 and 9052 each include a plurality of light emitters arranged in a matrix.

The plurality of light emitting bodies arranged so as to form the light emitting body units 9071 and 9072 include a plurality of types of light emitting elements, each of which has a different light emitting color from each other. For example, as each light emitting body, a full-color LED having a light emitting element capable of emitting light in R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is used. As a result, the movable member 9051 and the movable member 9052 emit light from the light emitter unit 9071, such as displaying various colors in a single color over the entire area and displaying a plurality of colors in a rainbow color by distinguishing them within the region. It is possible to perform a display effect according to the lighting mode of a plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged in the body unit 9072. As described above, the illuminant unit 9073 and the illuminant unit 9074 can execute the display effect by changing the color and pattern of the display (emission) using the plurality of illuminants with the passage of time. In front of the plurality of illuminants arranged in alignment with the illuminant units 9071 and 9072 included in the movable members 9051 and 9052, compartments formed in a grid pattern so as to partition each of the plurality of illuminants are provided. ing. Further, on the front surface of the compartments of the movable members 9051 and 9052, a front plate for decorating the movable members 9051 and 9052 is provided.

The movable members 9053 and 9054, like the movable members 9051 and 9052, each include a plurality of light emitting bodies arranged in a matrix. That is, a plurality of light emitters are aligned and arranged in each of the movable members 9053 and 9054 along a predetermined direction such as a vertical and horizontal direction (vertical and horizontal directions). The plurality of illuminants arranged in alignment with the movable member 9053 constitute the illuminant unit 9073 among the illuminant units 9071 to 9074 shown in FIG. 39. The plurality of illuminants arranged in alignment with the movable member 9054 constitute the illuminant unit 9074 among the illuminant units 9071 to 9074 shown in FIG. 39.

The plurality of light emitting bodies arranged so as to form the light emitting body units 9073 and 9074 include a plurality of types of light emitting elements, each of which has a different light emitting color from each other. For example, as each light emitting body, a full-color LED having a light emitting element capable of emitting light in R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is used. As a result, the movable member 9053 and the movable member 9054 emit light from the light emitter unit 9073, such as displaying various colors in a single color over the entire area and displaying a plurality of colors in a rainbow color by distinguishing them within the region. It is possible to perform a display effect by lighting modes of a plurality of light emitters arranged and arranged in the body unit 9074. As described above, the illuminant unit 9073 and the illuminant unit 9074 can execute the display effect by changing the color and pattern of the display (emission) using the plurality of illuminants with the passage of time. In front of the plurality of illuminants arranged in alignment with the illuminant units 9073 and 9074 included in the movable members 9053 and 9054, a partition body formed in a grid pattern is provided so as to partition each of the plurality of illuminants. ing. Further, a front plate for decorating the movable members 9053 and 9054 is provided on the front surface of the compartments of the movable members 9053 and 9054.

The plurality of light emitters are not limited to those using a full-color LED, and for example, a single color or a plurality of color LEDs may be used, or a light emitter other than the LED may be used. The compartment may be composed of members formed in a three-dimensional grid pattern, or may be composed of, for example, a grid pattern formed on a transparent or translucent plate material by printing or cutting. .. The compartments are not limited to those configured to partition a plurality of illuminants one by one, and may be configured to partition a plurality of illuminants by a predetermined number, or in a predetermined direction (for example, in the lateral direction). And vertically) may be configured to partition. Furthermore, it is not necessary to provide such a compartment.

As shown in FIG. 38 (A), in the retracted state in which the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are separated from each other, the movable members 9051 to 9054 overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA. It doesn't become. At this time, each of the movable members 9051 and 9052 is located above the main image display device 905MA, and the movable member 9052 is located behind the movable member 9051, so that the player cannot see or has difficulty in seeing the movable member 9052. It becomes. Further, each of the movable members 9053 and 9054 is located below the main image display device 905MA, and the movable member 9053 is located behind the movable member 9054, so that the player cannot see the movable member 9053 or makes it difficult to see. Become. In this way, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the retracted state, the display screen of the main image display device 905MA becomes visible.

As shown in FIG. 38 (B), the movable members 9051 to 9054 overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA in the advanced state in which the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are close to each other. .. When changing from the retracted state to the advanced state, the movable member 9052 moves downward with rotation from the back side of the movable member 9051, and the movable member 9053 moves upward with rotation from the back side of the movable member 9054. To do. Further, the movable member 9051 moves downward with the movement of the movable member 9052, and the movable member 9054 moves upward with the movement of the movable member 9053. In this way, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state, the display screen of the main image display device 905MA becomes difficult to see or cannot be seen.

When the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the retracted state, as shown in FIG. 38 (A), the arrangement directions of the plurality of light emitters aligned and arranged on the movable members 9051 to 9054 are the same. do not do. On the other hand, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), the arrangement direction of a plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with each of the movable members 9051 to 9054. Match. In this way, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state, the arrangement directions of the plurality of light emitters aligned and arranged on the movable members 9051 to 9054 are aligned, so that the movable member 9051 It is possible to give a sense of unity to the display effects in each of ~ 9054. In particular, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state, the effect of the effect can be improved by executing the integrated display effect by the plurality of movable members 9051 to 9054. Further, since the visibility of the main image display device 905MA to the display screen changes depending on the positions of the plurality of movable members 9051 to 9054, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous and improve the interest of the effect.

Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 903, and a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, and a right frame LED 909c are further provided around the game area. It is provided. Each structure in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, a normal winning ball device 906A, a normal variable winning ball device 906B, a special variable winning ball device 907, a frame member arranged on the peripheral edge of the main image display device 905MA, etc.) Decorative LEDs may be arranged in the surroundings. At the lower right position of the game machine frame 903, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The ball striking operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch for stopping the drive of the launch motor included in the ball striking device, or a touch ring (touch sensor).

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 903 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) An upper plate (ball hitting plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903, a lower plate is provided to hold (store) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

A stick controller 9031A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is. The stick controller 9031A includes an operation stick held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator hangs when the player holds the operation stick). There is. The trigger button can be operated by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, index finger) while the player holds the operating rod of the stick controller 9031A with an operating hand (for example, left hand). It suffices if it is configured as follows. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button may be built in the operation stick.

A controller sensor unit including a tilting direction sensor unit that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operation stick may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 9031A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit is two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged parallel to the board surface of the game board 902 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 901. Four transmissive types that combine (pair) and two transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pair) arranged perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 902 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player's side. It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

The member forming the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 9031B capable of a player performing a predetermined instruction operation by pressing or the like at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 9031A) on the upper surface of the upper plate body. It is provided. The push button 9031B may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player. A push sensor that detects the player's operation action performed on the push button 9031B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 9031B. When an operation by the player is detected in the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B, the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 39 changes the display effect on the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, or produces an effect. The operation of the movable mechanism 9050, the audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the lighting operation (blinking operation) of the light emitters such as the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are performed (for example, advance notice effect and reach effect). It may be used in such cases. Instead of the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B, or together with the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B, a sensor or the like for detecting the movement of the player may be provided. For example, a jog dial that can be rotated, a touch panel that can be touched or pressed, may be provided with a configuration that directly detects the movement of the player, or an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, Like the CMOS sensor, it may be provided with a configuration that indirectly (remotely) detects the movement of the player. The result of photographing a subject such as a player's hand using a predetermined camera may be analyzed (video type motion capture) so that an arbitrary motion can be detected. That is, it suffices to have an arbitrary configuration that can detect the operation of an arbitrary object mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, and an audio output board 9013 as shown in FIG. 39, for example. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is also equipped with a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. Further, the drive control board 9016B and the illuminant control boards 9016C to 9016F are mounted as control boards connected to the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 902 of the pachinko game machine 901.

The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special drawing game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 9011 performs lighting control and extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to control the lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It also has a function to control the variable display of a predetermined display symbol such as controlling the variable display of a special figure. For example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like are mounted on the main board 9011 shown in FIG. 39. The switch circuit 90110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting the game ball and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 90100. The solenoid circuit 90111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the solenoid 9027 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 9028 for the winning door.

As shown in FIG. 39, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 9021, a start port switch (first start port switch 9022A and a second start port switch 9022B), and a count switch 9023 are transmitted to the main board 9011. The wiring is connected. The various switches may have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a switch called a sensor.

The effect control board 9012 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 9011, and the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display are displayed based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015. Device 905SU, light emitter unit 9071 to 9074, speaker 908L, 908R, top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, movable members 9051 to 9054 and decorative members 9057 connected to operating motors 9060A to 9060C, and other effects. Various circuits for controlling the production operation by various production electrical components such as devices are installed. That is, the effect control board 9012 displays images in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, outputs audio from the speakers 908L and 908R, and lights up in a plurality of light emitters arranged in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. Operating motors 9060A to 9060C for moving the lighting, movable members 9051 to 9054, and decorative members 9057 in the light emitting members constituting the top frame LEDs 909a, left frame LEDs 909b, right frame LEDs 909c, and decorative LEDs, which are different from the light emitting body units 9071 to 9074. It has a function of determining the control content for causing the electric component for the effect to execute a predetermined effect operation such as the drive operation of the LED. The effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 39 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 90120, a ROM 90121, a RAM 90122, and effect data memories 90123A to 90123C.

The effect control board 9012 is used for wiring for transmitting a video signal to the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, and for transmitting a voice signal (sound effect signal) to the voice output board 9013. Wiring etc. are connected. Further, wiring for transmitting various signals is also connected to the drive control board 9016B, the illuminant control board 9016C, and the illuminant control board 9016D via the effect control relay board 9016A. The information signal transmitted to the drive control board 9016B may include a drive control signal indicating a command or control data for moving the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 by driving the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. .. The information signal transmitted to the light emitting body control board 9016C may include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitting bodies with respect to the light emitting body units 9071 to 9074.

Further, the light emitting body control board 9016D is mounted on the left side of the game machine frame 903, and the information signal transmitted to the light emitting body control board 9016D is provided as a left frame LED 909b on the left side of the game machine frame 903. It suffices to include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitting bodies. Further, the light emitting body control board 9016E is mounted above the game machine frame 903, and the information signal transmitted to the light emitting body control board 9016E is provided as a top frame LED 909a above the game machine frame 903. It suffices to include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitting bodies. Further, the light emitting body control board 9016F is mounted on the right side of the game machine frame 903, and the information signal transmitted to the light emitting body control board 9016F is provided as a right frame LED 909c on the right side of the game machine frame 903. It suffices to include a lighting signal indicating light emission data for lighting a plurality of light emitting bodies.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the information signal transmitted to the illuminant control board 9016D is only the effect control relay board 9016A from the effect control microcomputer 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012. Is relayed and transmitted. Further, the information signal transmitted to the light emitting body control board 9016E is transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 by relaying the light emitting body control board 9016D in addition to the effect control relay board 9016A. To. Further, the information signal transmitted to the illuminant control board 9016F is transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 to the effect control relay board 9016A, as well as the illuminant control board 9016D and the illuminant control board 9016E. Is relayed and transmitted.

Further, from the drive control board 9016B, a position detection signal as an information signal indicating the result of detecting the positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 by the movable member position sensor 9061 is transmitted to the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. Is transmitted to. Further, as wiring for receiving an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 9031A has been detected, or as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 9031B has been detected. The wiring for receiving the operation detection signal of the above may also be connected to the effect control board 9012.

The audio output board 9013 is a board for audio output provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is for outputting sound from the speakers 908L and 908R, which are sound output devices, in accordance with the audio signal from the effect control board 9012. Various circuits are installed.

The effect control relay board 9016A is installed on a back pack or the like attached to the back surface of the game board 902, and is transmitted from the effect control board 9012 toward the drive control board 9016B, the illuminant control board 9016C, and the illuminant control board 9016D. Various signals are relayed. The back pack may be attached to the central portion on the back surface side of the game board 902, and an opening facing the main image display device 905MA may be formed in the center thereof. The back pack may be provided so as to cover the main board 9011, the audio output board 9013, the drive control board 9016B, the illuminant control board 9016C, and the like from the rear. An effect control board box containing the effect control board 9012 may be attached to the rear surface side of the back pack.

The drive control board 9016B is a control board for controlling the effect movable mechanism provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and the movable members 9051 to 9054 are rotated based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with a driver IC for controlling and controlling the movement of the decorative member 9057. The output signal from the drive control board 9016B is transmitted toward the operating motors 9060A to 9060C. Further, if the drive control board 9016B includes wiring for transmitting the position detection signal output from the movable member position sensor 9061 to the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. Good. The illuminant control board 9016C is a control board for illuminant output provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and is arranged in the illuminant units 9071 to 9074 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. It is equipped with various circuits for driving the light emitters for controlling the lighting of the plurality of light emitters.

The light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F are control boards for light emitter output mounted on the game machine frame 903 and separately provided from the effect control board 9012, and commands and control data from the effect control board 9012 and the like. Based on this, various circuits for driving a light emitter for controlling lighting of a plurality of light emitters provided as a top frame LED909a, a left frame LED909b, and a right frame LED909c are mounted.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, display control commands used to control image display operations in the main image display device 905MA and sub image display device 905SU, and audio used to control audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R. Control command, top frame LED909a, left frame LED909b, right frame LED909c, decorative LED, light emitter control command used to control the lighting operation of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, and movable effect It includes movable mechanism control commands and the like used to control the operation of the mechanism 9050 and the like.

The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 that stores game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 that executes the game control program and performs the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 90103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 90104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105. The random number circuit 90104 is not limited to the one built in the game control microcomputer 90100, and may be externally attached to the game control microcomputer 90100.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 90103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 90103 writes various variable data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data in which the CPU 90103 is temporarily stored in the RAM 90102. The variable data read operation, the CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed. The random number circuit 90104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game.

The ROM 90101 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 90103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 90101 is configured with table data constituting a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 9011 and a variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data to be used is stored.

FIG. 40 shows a configuration example of various circuits mounted on the effect control board 9012. For example, the effect control microcomputer 90120, ROM 90121, RAM 90122, effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the like are mounted on the effect control board 9012. The ROM 90121, RAM 90122, and effect data memories 90123A to 90123C may be partially or wholly built in the effect control microcomputer 90120, or part or all of them may be outside the effect control microcomputer 90120. It may be attached. The effect control microcomputer 90120 shown in FIG. 40 is configured by using, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a CPU 90130, a work memory 90131, a host interface 90132, a DRAM interface 90133, and a data memory interface 90134. There is. Further, the effect control microcomputer 90120 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 90140, a VRAM (Video RAM) 90141, a display output system interface 90142, an audio processing circuit 90143, an audio interface 90144, and a general-purpose output controller 90145. It has. The VDP90140 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The VDP 90140, VRAM 90141, display output system interface 90142, audio processing circuit 90143, audio interface 90144, and general-purpose output controller 90145 may be partly or wholly built in the effect control microcomputer 90120, or partly. Alternatively, all of them may be configured as an external circuit of the effect control microcomputer 90120.

The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 executes the control process according to the effect control program. The ROM 90121 stores a program for effect control, fixed data, and the like that are read out by the CPU 90130 to execute the control process. The RAM 90122 temporarily stores various effect data read from the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. The effect data temporarily stored in the RAM 90122 is provided for executing various processes by the CPU 90130 and the VDP 90140. In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 90121 stores various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation. For example, in the ROM 90121, a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination table, and various effect control patterns are configured. Pattern data etc. are stored. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, illuminant control data, movable member control data, operation detection control data, etc.) and an end code associated with the effect control process timer determination value. It is composed of process data including. Various data used for controlling the effect operation are stored in the RAM 90122.

The effect data memories 90123A to 90123C store fixed data for executing the effect. Of the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B have storage areas for preliminarily storing various image data (image element data) indicating the display image in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. It suffices if it is provided. The effect data memory 90123C includes a storage area for storing various motor data indicating the drive control contents of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C in advance, and the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. A storage area or the like for storing various light emission data indicating the lighting control contents in advance may be provided. The light emission data indicating the lighting control contents of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 may be generated by using the image data. The effect data memories 90123A to 90123C may be, for example, non-rewritable semiconductor memories, rewritable semiconductor memories such as flash memory such as NAND-ROM, or non-volatile such as magnetic memory and optical memory. It may be configured by using any of the sex recording media.

The data for creating the lighting data (light emission data) of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. Separately from the image data of the effect image, it is stored in advance in either the effect data memory 90123A or 90123B. The data for creating the lighting data (light emission data) of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is added to the image data of the effect image to be displayed on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU, and the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B. It may be stored in advance in any of. Alternatively, the data for creating the lighting data of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is the effect data memory 90123A to the effect data memory 90123A ~ The display data stored in advance in any of the 90123Cs and used to create the lighting data when the VDP 90140 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 executes the drawing process is the display of the effect image on the display screen of the sub image display device 905SU. It may be added to the data.

FIG. 41 shows a setting example of addresses, stored contents, and the like in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. FIG. 41 (A) shows an example of setting the storage contents in the ROM 90121. The ROM 90121 is assigned consecutive addresses from the address MA00, which is the start address, to the address MA10, which is the final address. FIG. 41 (B1) shows an example of setting the storage contents in the effect data memory 90123A. As the start address, the effect data memory 90123A is given an address MA10 + 1, which is a continuous next address to the final address of the ROM 90121, and is given a continuous address up to the address MA20, which is the final address. FIG. 41 (B2) shows an example of setting the storage contents in the effect data memory 90123B. As the start address, the effect data memory 90123B is assigned an address MA20 + 1, which is a continuous next address to the final address of the effect data memory 90123A, and is assigned a continuous address up to the address MA30, which is the final address. FIG. 41 (B3) shows an example of setting the storage contents in the effect data memory 90123C. As the start address, the effect data memory 90123C is assigned an address MA30 + 1, which is a continuous next address to the final address of the effect data memory 90123B, and a continuous address up to the address MA40, which is the final address. In this way, continuous addresses are assigned to the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the next address of the final address in the ROM 90121 is the start address of the effect data memory 90123A.

In the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, programs and data used for executing the effect by various effect devices are stored in advance as effect data (including binary codes constituting the program module). The ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are provided with a plurality of storage areas (storage areas) according to the storage contents. For example, the ROM 90121 has a first storage area in which a program for effect control and various management data are stored, a second storage area in which audio data is stored, and a reserve other than the first storage area and the second storage area. There is an area. For example, when the entire ROM 90121 has a storage capacity of 8 gigabits, the first storage area may have a storage capacity of 1 gigabit and the second storage area may have a storage capacity of 6 gigabits. The first storage area may have a storage capacity of 1.5 gigabits or 2 gigabits. The effect data memory 90123A is provided with a storage area for storing audio data and a storage area for storing image data. Table data of various tables prepared for the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, pattern data constituting the effect control pattern, and the like are stored in the ROM 90121 as management data. Just do it. Audio data used for controlling the sound output by the speakers 908L and 908R is stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A. The effect data memories 90123A and 90123B store image data used for controlling the display of the effect image in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, and further, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame. Image data used for lighting control in a light emitting body such as the LED 909c and a plurality of light emitting bodies aligned and arranged in the light emitting body units 9071 to 9074 may be stored.

The ROM 90121 is provided with a storage area for storing audio data, and at least audio data is stored. Therefore, the ROM 90121 provides a first area for storing voice data as first control data used for voice control for outputting voice from at least the speakers 908L and 908R. The effect data memory 90123A is provided with a storage area for storing image data. Therefore, the effect data memory 90123A is a display control for displaying an image on the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, or a light emitter such as a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, or a right frame LED 909c, and a light emitting body unit 9071 to 9074. Provided is a second area for storing image data as second control data used for lighting control for lighting a plurality of light emitters arranged in.

In this embodiment, a storage area for storing audio data is provided not only in the ROM 90121 but also in the effect data memory 90123A. The storage area in which the audio data is stored in the ROM 90121 is assigned from the address MA02 shown in FIG. 41 (A) to the address MA10 which is the final address in the ROM 90121. As shown in FIG. 41 (B1), the storage area in which the audio data is stored in the effect data memory 90123A is allocated from the address MA10 + 1 to the address MA11, which is the start address of the effect data memory 90123A. In this way, the effect data memory 90123A that provides the second area stores audio data in a continuous specific address range from the next address MA10 + 1 to the address MA11 of the final address MA10 of the ROM 90121 that provides the first area. Area is assigned. In the effect data memory 90123A that provides the second area, voice data as the first control data is stored in the storage area corresponding to the specific address range that is continuous from the final address of the ROM 90121 that provides the first area. That is, the audio data as the first control data is the final of the ROM 90121 not only in the storage area provided in the ROM 90121 providing the first area but also in the storage area provided in the effect data memory 90123A providing the second area. It is also stored in the storage area to which consecutive addresses from the address MA10 + 1, which is the next address of the address MA10, to the address MA11 are assigned.

The effect data memory 90123A originally provides a storage area for storing image data used for display control of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. On the other hand, since it is necessary to prepare audio data corresponding to various musical pieces, the amount of control information data to be stored in order to control the production by various production devices in ROM 90121 or the like increases, and the storage capacity becomes insufficient. In some cases. In this case, if a separate new storage device is prepared, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 901 increases. Therefore, by providing the effect data memory 90123A with a data storage area used for control different from the image data, the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 901 can be reduced. When the audio data storage area is provided, the storage area corresponding to the specific address range continuous from the final address assigned to the audio data storage area in the ROM 90121 is allocated to the effect data memory 90123A. As a result, even if the audio data is stored across both the storage area of the ROM 90121 and the storage area of the effect data memory 90123A, the address is updated (incremented) and read out in the same manner as the other audio data. Therefore, the voice data can be appropriately read out.

The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 shown in FIG. 40 executes a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect control electric component according to the effect control program read from the ROM 90121. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 90130 reads fixed data from the ROM 90121 via the host interface 90132, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 90130 writes various variable data to the RAM 90122 via the DRAM interface 90133 and temporarily stores the variable data, the CPU 90130. Is a variable data read operation that reads various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 90122 via the DRAM interface 90133, and the CPU 90130 receives various signals from the outside of the effect control microcomputer 90120 such as the main board 9011 via the host interface 90132 or the like. A reception operation for receiving input, a transmission operation in which the CPU 90130 outputs various signals to the outside of the effect control microcomputer 90120 via the host interface 90132 and various other circuits are also performed. Further, the CPU 90130 can access the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C via the data memory interface 90134 to read the stored data and the like.

The VDP 90140 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 has image data processing functions such as a high-speed drawing function and a moving image decoding function for displaying various images on the screen of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. This is an image processor that executes image data processing in accordance with a display control command from the CPU 90130. The VDP 90140 can access the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C via the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 90120 or the data memory interface 90134, and can read out image data and the like.

The VRAM 90141 provides a work area for temporarily storing image data read from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B, and a virtual display in which display data of the effect image created by drawing processing by the VDP 90140 is expanded and stored. Provide an area. If the storage area of the VRAM 90141 is allocated, for example, a palette area in which the palette data is arranged, a character buffer in which the character image data read from the image data memory 121 is stored, a CG buffer, and the like. Good. The CG buffer temporarily saves palette data in which the display color of the character is defined when the drawing process by VDP90140 is executed, or temporarily saves the display data of the effect image created by the drawing process. It is used to do things like that. The display data expanded and stored in the VRAM 90141 may be, for example, pixel data (raster data) created by the VDP 90140 based on vector data (vector data) such as points, lines, and polygons. The VRAM 90141 contains, for example, an actual display area for storing display data of various images displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA and display data of various images not displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. A virtual display area to be stored may be included. Alternatively, display data for displaying a screen having the same size as the display screen of the main image display device 905MA is created in the virtual display area of the VRAM 90141, and the display data of the virtual display area read by the VDP 90140 is displayed and output. It may be output from the system interface 90142 to the side of the main image display device 905MA.

An image display area and an image drawing area may be allocated to the storage area of the VRAM 90141. In the image display area, display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU is stored. In the image drawing area, the display data of each effect image created by the drawing process is stored. The image display area and the image drawing area may be switched to each other each time a V blank occurs. The V blank occurs at a cycle of updating the image displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU. Every time the V blank is started, a V blank interrupt signal is output from the VDP 90140 to the CPU 90130, and various other interrupt signals are output from the VDP 90140 to the CPU 90130.

By switching between the image display area and the image drawing area each time a V blank occurs, display data of each effect image is created in the storage area allocated as the image drawing area in a certain V blank cycle (first drawing display period). The drawing process is performed, and in the next V blank period (second drawing display period), this storage area is switched to the image display area. Therefore, the display data created by the drawing process in the first drawing display period is output from the display output system interface 90142 to the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU in the second drawing display period, and also. In the storage area to which the image drawing area is allocated in the second drawing display period, the display data created by the drawing process is stored.

A mainframe buffer and a subframe buffer may be allocated to each of the storage areas to which the image display area and the image drawing area are allocated in the VRAM 90141. In the main frame buffer, display data for displaying an effect image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA is stored. In the subframe buffer, display data for displaying the effect image on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU is stored.

The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 accesses the system register and the attribute register built in the VDP 90140. Then, various commands and data are stored in the system register and the attribute register according to the process data such as the display control data included in the effect control pattern. In this way, in the effect control microcomputer 90120, the display operation in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU is indirectly controlled by the CPU 90130.

The process data shows the setting contents that the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 performs on the system register and the attribute register of the VDP 90140 each time a V blank occurs. The system register settings include drawing, data transfer commands, CG data and palette data for data transfer, and attribute settings. Further, the setting content of the attribute register may indicate an attribute as a parameter used in the drawing process of the effect image. In the process data, the attribute is set so that the image is updated every time a V blank occurs. As a result, the image can be updated every time a V blank occurs.

The display output system interface 90142 sets the color signal (gradation control signal), the predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal), and the scanning signal (drive control signal) according to the display data output from the VDP 90140 as the main image display device 905MA. Various images can be displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA by outputting to. Further, the display output system interface 90142 displays a sub-image of a color signal (gradation control signal), a predetermined clock signal (dot clock signal), and a scanning signal (drive control signal) according to the display data output from the VDP 90140. By outputting to the device 905SU, various images can be displayed on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU.

The voice processing circuit 90143 is a processing circuit that executes voice signal processing. The voice processing circuit 90143 accesses the ROM 90121 via the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 90120 or the host interface 90132, or the effect data memory 90123A to the effect data memory 90123A via the internal bus or the data memory interface 90134 of the effect control microcomputer 90120. By accessing the 90123C, it is possible to read out audio data and the like. The audio processing circuit 90143 may directly access the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, or may be read from the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C by access by the CPU 90130, for example. It may be accessed indirectly by receiving the supply of voice data. The voice processing circuit 90143 generates a voice signal (sound effect signal) using the voice data. The voice signal (sound effect signal) generated by the voice processing circuit 90143 is output to the voice output board 9013 via the voice interface 90144.

The general-purpose output controller 90145 has various effects such as lighting control of a plurality of light emitters constituting the top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, and light emitter units 9071 to 9074, and drive control of operation motors 9060A to 9060C. This is a control circuit for controlling the operation of the device. The general-purpose output controller 90145 can read out motor data and light emission data by accessing the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C via the internal bus of the effect control microcomputer 90120 or the data memory interface 90134. The general-purpose output controller 90145 may directly access the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. For example, the motor data and light emission read from the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C by the access by the CPU 90130. It may be accessed indirectly by receiving the supply of data. The general-purpose output controller 90145 outputs the motor data and light emission data read from the effect data memory 90123C, or the display data supplied from the VDP 90140 as serial signal type data (serial data). The serial data output from the general-purpose output controller 90145 may be transmitted to the drive control board 9016B, the illuminant control board 9016C, and the illuminant control board 9016D via the effect control relay board 9016A.

FIG. 42 shows a configuration example of a light emitter control board 9016C for controlling lighting of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. The light emitter control board 9016C is equipped with various circuits for controlling the lighting mode of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 by the plurality of light emitters. The illuminant control board 9016C shown in FIG. 42 is equipped with a buffer memory 90151, a lighting data generation circuit 90152, a serial output circuit 90153, and a illuminant drive unit 90154.

The buffer memory 90151 temporarily stores the data transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. The data temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 may be any data corresponding to the display data generated by the VDP 90140 or the light emission data read from the effect data memory 90123C. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 reads the stored data in the buffer memory 90151 and executes a predetermined conversion process to generate lighting data constituting the lighting control information. The lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 includes drive control data that is drive control information that specifies the drive timing of the light emitter, and a floor that specifies the brightness (gradation) corresponding to each emission color of the light emitter. It suffices if the gradation data serving as the key control information is included.

The lighting data generation circuit 90152 divides a region in which a plurality of illuminants constituting the illuminant units 9071 to 9074 are arranged in each of the movable members 9051 to 9054 into a plurality of blocks, and the illuminant for each block. Create lighting data for. In this embodiment, illuminant blocks B01 to B42 are preset as a plurality of blocks. The lighting data generation circuit 90153 generates lighting data corresponding to each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42.

FIG. 43 shows a setting example in which a region in the movable member 9051 in which a plurality of light emitters are aligned is divided into a plurality of blocks. The regions where a plurality of light emitters are arranged in the movable member 9051 are divided into light emitter blocks B01 to B06 as shown in FIG. 43 (A) and light emitter blocks B07 to B15 as shown in FIG. It is divided. Similar to the movable member 9051, the movable members 9052 to 9054 other than the movable member 9051 are also set so that the region in which the plurality of light emitters are arranged is divided into a plurality of blocks. As a result, the entire light emitter units 9071 to 9074 provided in each of the movable members 9051 to 9054 are divided into light emitter blocks B01 to B42. The number of divisions of the light emitting body block may be arbitrarily set based on the number of movable members constituting the effect movable mechanism 9050, the size of the area in which the plurality of light emitting bodies are arranged, and the like. ..

Each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 has a rectangular shape such as a rectangle or a square as a basic shape. Therefore, due to the shape of the movable members 9051 to 9054, etc., the area in which a plurality of light emitters are arranged in each of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 cannot fit in the rectangular light emitter block, and one light emission There may be a surplus area where illuminants less than the body block are placed. Further, in the plurality of illuminant blocks, an empty area in which the illuminant is not arranged may occur in a part of the square shape. Therefore, by including the surplus area in which the light emitting bodies less than one light emitting body block are arranged in the empty area in any of the light emitting body blocks, the processing load of the lighting control for the plurality of light emitting bodies is reduced.

The serial output circuit 90153 outputs a control signal including lighting control information corresponding to the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 to the light emitter drive unit 90154 in a serial signal system. The control signal corresponding to the lighting data may include a drive control signal corresponding to the drive control data and a gradation data signal corresponding to the gradation data. The serial output circuit 90153 has a plurality of signal output configurations (output circuit and output wiring) such as 21 systems as a serial output system for outputting a control signal. Serial signal wirings corresponding to each of the 21 serial output systems K01 to K21 are connected to the serial output circuit 90153, and a control signal including lighting control information is output to each wiring in a serial signal system. In this way, the serial output circuit 90153 outputs a control signal including lighting control information to a plurality of serial signal wirings in a serial signal system.

FIG. 44 shows an example of connection setting between the serial output system and the illuminant block. In the connection setting example shown in FIG. 44, two illuminant blocks out of the illuminant blocks B01 to B42 are assigned to each serial output system K01 to K21. For example, a light emitting body driver for controlling lighting of the light emitting body block B01 and the light emitting body block B02 is connected to the serial output system K01 via the serial signal wiring. A light emitter driver for controlling lighting of the light emitter block B03 and the light emitter block B04 is connected to the serial output system K02 via serial signal wiring. Also for the serial output system K03 and later, a light emitter driver and the like for lighting control of two light emitter blocks are connected to one serial output system. A plurality of light emitter drivers that control lighting of the light emitters included in the light emitter block assigned to the serial output system 1 may be connected by a serial bus method via serial signal wiring. Note that the connection is not limited to the serial bus method, and a plurality of light emitter drivers may be connected in series (connected by the daisy chain method).

The light emitting body driving unit 90154 shown in FIG. 42 includes a plurality of driver ICs (light emitting body drivers) that control lighting of a plurality of light emitting bodies included in the regions divided into the light emitting body blocks B01 to B42. .. Each driver IC controls the lighting of a plurality of light emitters based on the lighting control information indicated by the control signal transmitted from the serial output circuit 90153 via the serial signal wiring. Each driver IC is configured to include, for example, a shift register, converts data transmitted by the serial signal system into data of the parallel signal system, and outputs the data to a plurality of signal lines. Each of the plurality of illuminant drivers has a driver IC on the strobe side, which is a drive control circuit that controls the drive of the illuminant according to the drive control data indicated by the drive control signal, and the gradation data indicated by the gradation data signal. It is classified into one of the digit-side driver ICs, which is a gradation control circuit that controls the gradation of the light emitting body accordingly. In each of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42, dynamic lighting control of a plurality of light emitters is performed for each light emitter block by using the driver IC on the strobe side and the driver IC on the digit side. As shown in FIG. 42, in the illuminant control board 9016C, the control signals transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 are sequentially transmitted between the illuminant drivers on the same illuminant control board 9016C. By doing so, it is configured to be transmitted to each illuminant driver.

As a specific example, FIG. 45 shows a configuration example of a light emitter driver using a driver IC corresponding to the light emitter block B11. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 45, as a plurality of light emitter drivers corresponding to the light emitter block B11, a light emitter driver 90411S on the strobe side, a light emitter driver 90411DU on the upper side of the digit, and a light emitter driver 90411DD on the lower side of the digit are used. It is provided. In the serial signal wiring of the serial output system K06 shown in FIG. 44, the strobe side illuminant driver 90411S corresponding to the illuminant block B11, the digit upper illuminant driver 90411DU, and the digit lower illuminant driver 90411DD are arranged from the serial output circuit 90153. It suffices to be connected in the order of the above, and then to the illuminant driver provided corresponding to the illuminant block B12.

Address information different from each other is assigned to each of the light emitting body driver 90411S, the light emitting body driver 90411DU, and the light emitting body driver 90411DD. The serial output circuit 90153 outputs a control signal indicating lighting control information to which address information is added to the serial signal wiring included in the serial output system K06, so that any of the plurality of light emitter drivers corresponding to the light emitter block B11. Crab lighting Control information is transmitted.

The serial signal wiring may include a serial clock wiring in which the serial clock SC is transmitted and a serial data wiring in which the serial data SD synchronized with the serial clock SC is transmitted. The light emitter driver connected to the serial signal wiring takes in drive control data or gradation data transmitted as serial data SD synchronized with the serial clock SC, and controls lighting of a plurality of light emitters.

The illuminant block B11 includes a half block B11U composed of a plurality of illuminants whose gradation is controlled by the illuminant driver 90411DU on the upper side of the digit, and a plurality of illuminants whose gradation is controlled by the illuminant driver 90411DD on the lower side of the digit. It is composed of a combination with a half block B11D composed of. As described above, each illuminant block may be composed of a combination of half blocks that are modules smaller than the illuminant block. The plurality of illuminant blocks are not limited to those composed of a combination of two half blocks. For example, the plurality of illuminant blocks may include a illuminant block composed of only one half block in addition to the illuminant block composed of a combination of two half blocks. When the illuminant block B11 is composed of only one half block, the illuminant driver 90411S on the strobe side and the illuminant driver 90411DU on the upper side of the digit are provided, but the illuminant driver 90411DD on the lower side of the digit is not provided. It may be configured. As described above, each illuminant block may be configured to include one illuminant driver on the strobe side and one or two illuminant drivers on the digit side.

The half block B11U and the half block B11D may be configured so that the number of light emitters is the same. For example, the strobe driver 90411S outputs a strobe signal which is a drive control signal for driving and controlling a plurality of light emitters arranged in 12 rows to which 12 strobe signal lines are connected. Eight digit signal lines are connected to the light emitter driver 90411DU on the upper side of the digit and the light emitter driver 90411DD on the lower side of the digit, respectively, and gradation data for controlling the gradation of a plurality of light emitters arranged in eight lines. Outputs a digit signal that becomes a signal. Therefore, both the half block B11U corresponding to the upper side of the digit and the half block B11D corresponding to the lower side of the digit are formed so as to include a total of 96 illuminants consisting of 12 columns on the strobe side and 8 rows on the digit side. There is. Similarly, the half blocks constituting the illuminant block other than the illuminant block B11 may be formed so as to include a total of 96 illuminants. As described above, each of the half blocks as a module constituting the illuminant block may be configured so that the same number of illuminants can be lit and controlled.

The number of illuminants included in one half block is not limited to 96 in total, and may be any number predetermined based on the specifications and design of the illuminant driver. For example, when a plurality of light emitters arranged in eight columns are driven and controlled with eight strobe signal lines, a total of 64 light emitters consisting of eight columns on the strobe side and eight rows on the digit side are used. It may be formed so as to be included in one half block. Further, the number of illuminants whose lighting can be controlled by one half block and the number of illuminants actually included in one half block do not necessarily have to always match. For example, while the number of illuminants whose lighting can be controlled by one half block is 96, the number of illuminants actually included in one half block depends on the arrangement of illuminants in the illuminant units 9071 to 9074 and the like. It may be less than 96 pieces. As described above, it suffices that the lighting is controlled to control the lighting of a predetermined number or less of the light emitting bodies for each half block as a module smaller than the plurality of blocks in which the area in which the plurality of light emitting bodies are arranged is divided.

The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data for dynamically lighting controlling a plurality of light emitters for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42. For example, as drive control data that serves as drive control information for designating the drive timing of the light emitter, control data for time-division driving a plurality of light emitters at different timings for each strobe signal line is generated. Further, gradation data as gradation control information for designating the brightness (gradation) for each emission color is generated by PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) control according to a plurality of light emitters connected to each digit signal line. The light emitting body driver on the digit side is not limited to the one that controls the gradation of the light emitting body according to the output period of the pulse signal as in the PWM control method. For example, the number of pulse signals to be output within a certain period ( The gradation of the illuminant may be controlled according to the physical amount (pulse amount) of the pulse signal, such as the number of pulses) and the amplitude (drive current value) of the pulse signal.

The serial output circuit 90153 outputs the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 to the serial signal wiring of the serial output system to which the light emitter block to be controlled by lighting is connected by the serial signal method. The strobe-side illuminant driver provided corresponding to each illuminant block drives and controls a plurality of illuminants connected to the strobe signal line by outputting a strobe signal based on the drive control data. The illuminant driver on the upper side of the digit or the lower side of the digit provided corresponding to each illuminant block outputs a digit signal based on the gradation data to gradation a plurality of illuminants connected to the digit signal line. Control. In this way, in each of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment emit light at a duty ratio corresponding to the digit signal during the light emission drive period when the strobe signal is turned on, and the plurality of light emitter blocks The lighting mode can be changed for each of B01 to B42 by a dynamic lighting method (also referred to as a pulse lighting method, a duty lighting method, or a time division lighting method). In this way, by configuring the illuminant blocks B01 to B42 to perform dynamic lighting control for each of the plurality of illuminant blocks B01 to B42, the illuminant drive unit 90154 can execute lighting control in parallel using a plurality of illuminant drivers. ..

FIG. 46 (1) shows a configuration example of the drive control board 9016B. As shown in FIG. 46 (1), the motor drive driver 90412 is mounted on the drive control board 9016B. A control signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 is input to the motor drive driver 90412 in the form of a serial signal via the effect control relay board 9016A. Then, the motor drive driver 90412 performs drive control of the operation motors 9060A, 9060B, 9060C based on the drive control information indicated by the input control signal.

The detection signal from the movable member position sensor 9061 is also input to the drive control board 9016B and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A. The description is omitted in the example shown in FIG. 46 (1).

FIG. 46 (2) shows a configuration example of the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c. As shown in FIG. 46 (2), the illuminant driver 90413b is mounted on the illuminant control board 9016D. A control signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 is input to the light emitting body driver 90413b via the effect control relay board 9016A in a serial signal format. Then, the light emitting body driver 90413b controls the lighting of the left frame LED 909b based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal. In FIG. 46 (2), the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F are connected to each other via wiring members such as a flexible cable and a wire harness, for example.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46 (2), the light emitting body driver 90413a is mounted on the light emitting body control board 9016E. In the illuminant driver 90413a, the control signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 passes through the effect control relay board 9016A and further via the illuminant control board 9016D in a serial signal format. Entered. Then, the light emitting body driver 90413a controls the lighting of the top frame LED 909a based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46 (2), the light emitting body driver 90413c is mounted on the light emitting body control board 9016F. In the illuminant driver 90413c, the control signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 passes through the effect control relay board 9016A, and further passes through the illuminant control board 9016D and the illuminant control board 9016E. Is input in serial signal format. Then, the light emitting body driver 90413c controls the lighting of the right frame LED 909c based on the lighting control information indicated by the input control signal.

As shown in FIG. 46 (2), in the illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F, the control signals transmitted from the effect control microcomputer 90120 of the effect control board 9012 are transmitted to the different illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F, respectively. It is configured to be transmitted to each of the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c by being sequentially transmitted between the mounted light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c.

Further, in this embodiment, each LED provided in the game machine frame 903 is comprehensively expressed as a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, and a right frame LED 909c, respectively. Specifically, the game machine A plurality of light emitters (color LED or single color LED) are provided above the frame 903 as a top frame LED 909a, and a plurality of light emitters (color LED or single color LED) are provided as a left frame LED 909b to the left of the game machine frame 903. It is assumed that a plurality of light emitters (color LED or monochromatic LED) are provided as a right frame LED 909c on the right side of the game machine frame 903.

Further, in this embodiment, the light emitter drivers for controlling the lighting of the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 (for example, the light emitter drivers 90411S, 90411DU, 90411DD shown in FIG. 45; hereinafter, simply The light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the light emitter driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are serial-parallel conversion circuits of the same type. It is realized by using (integrated circuit (IC)). FIG. 47 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a serial-parallel conversion circuit used as a illuminant driver 90411, a motor drive driver 90412, and illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c. Further, FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each input / output terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit shown in FIG. 47.

The serial-parallel conversion circuit used as the illuminant driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c converts the input serial signal format signal into a 24-channel parallel signal format signal. There are two types, one that outputs and the other that converts the input serial signal format signal into a 12-channel parallel signal format signal and outputs it, but only the number of some circuit elements and terminals is different. In order to have the same configuration and function, the serial-parallel conversion circuit for 24 channels will be described as a representative in the examples shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit for 12 channels will be different. Only the part will be explained. In this embodiment, the illuminant driver 90411 is realized by a serial-parallel conversion circuit for 24 channels, and the motor drive driver 90412 and the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c are realized by a serial-parallel conversion circuit for 12 channels. To.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, a clock signal from the effect control microcomputer 90120 is input to the serial-parallel conversion circuit via the effect control relay board 9016A and the light emitter control boards 9016D and 9016E. A / I terminal and a DATA / I terminal for inputting data are provided. In addition, a part of the input clock signal and data is branched in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, and can be output through from the serial-parallel conversion circuit as it is, and the CLK / O terminal and data that output the clock signal through can be output. A DATA / O terminal for through output is provided.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (2), the light emitting body driver 90413b of the light emitting body control board 16D is a control signal (clock signal and data) input via the effect control relay board 9016A. Is output to the light emitting body driver 90413a of the light emitting body control board 9016E, and clock signals and data are emitted from the CLK / O terminal and the DATA / O terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit that realizes the light emitting body driver 90413b, respectively. It is configured to be output to a serial-parallel conversion circuit that implements the body driver 90413a. Further, for example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (2), the light emitting body driver 90413a of the light emitting body control board 9016E is input via the effect control relay board 9016A and the light emitting body control board 9016D. The control signal (clock signal and data) is output to the illuminant driver 90413c of the illuminant control board 9016F. The CLK / O terminal and DATA / O terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit that realizes the illuminant driver 90413a. The clock signal and data are respectively configured to be output to the serial-parallel conversion circuit that realizes the light emitter driver 90413c.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the clock signal input from the CLK / I terminal and the other part of the data input from the DATA / I terminal are input to the decoder and 24 channels from the serial signal format. It is decoded into a signal of the parallel signal format of. Then, after being temporarily stored in each register provided in the register block, pulse width modulation (PWM) is performed using the internal clock signal (6 MHz internal clock signal in this example) by the internal oscillation clock circuit, and each of them is subjected to pulse width modulation (PWM). It is output from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. In the case of a 12-channel circuit, it is converted into a 12-channel parallel signal format signal and output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11. The output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are supplied to a light emitter such as an LED or to an operation motor.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is provided with terminals AD0 to AD4 for decoding address input (AD0 to AD5 in a 12-channel circuit), and terminals AD0 to AD4 are provided. By setting it to H (high) or L (low), respectively, it is possible to set the address for each serial-parallel conversion circuit. The data input from DATA / I also includes address information, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit decodes only the data whose address information contained in the input data matches the set address into a parallelless signal format signal. Output from drive output terminals Q0 to Q23.

Since the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is provided with 5 terminals AD0 to AD4 for decoding address input, a maximum of 32 types of addresses can be set, and a maximum of 32 serial-parallel conversions can be set. It is possible to connect circuits. Further, since the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is provided with 6 terminals AD0 to AD5 for decoding address input, a maximum of 64 types of addresses can be set, and a maximum of 64 serial-parallel conversions can be set. It is possible to connect circuits.

The S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting the slew rate of the clock signal output from the CLK / O terminal and the slew rate of the data output from the DATA / O terminal. .. When the S terminal is set to L (low), the clock signal and data slew output is set to the normal slew rate output, and when the S terminal is set to H (high), the clock signal and data slew output is set to a low slew rate. Set to output.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the slew rate setting of the through output of the clock signal and the data. As shown in FIG. 49 (1), when the S terminal is set to L (low) and the output is set to a normal slew rate, the rising and falling slopes of the clock signal and data waveforms (voltage change per unit time). Amount) is large to some extent. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 49 (2), when the S terminal is set to H (high) and the output is set to a low slew rate, the clock signal and the clock signal are set as compared with the case of setting the normal slew rate. The slope of the rising and falling edges of the data waveform becomes gentle.

Generally, in order to suppress radio wave radiation from the substrate, it is better to keep the slew rate low, and it is better to set the output to the low slew rate shown in FIG. 49 (2). On the other hand, in order to secure resistance to noise, it is better that the slopes of the rising and falling edges of the waveform are large, and it is better to set the output of the normal slew rate shown in FIG. 49 (1).

The setting of the S terminal is not limited to simply setting the waveform of the clock signal output from the CLK / O terminal and the through output waveform of the data output from the DATA / O terminal, but also the clock signal and DATA input from the CLK / I terminal. It has a function to compensate the output waveform for the data input from the / I terminal. That is, in general, the clock signal and data output from the effect control microcomputer 90120 or the like are output as a square wave at the output stage, but the CLK / I terminal and the DATA / I terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit are output. When the transmission loss due to wiring until reaching is large, a clock signal or data having a waveform collapsed from the original square wave may be input. In this embodiment, the serial-parallel conversion circuit does not simply output the input clock signal or data through as it is, but the clock signal or data input in a state of a waveform collapsed from the original square wave in this way. It has a function to compensate and output a waveform close to the original square wave. In this case, if the output is set to a normal slew rate by setting the S terminal, the output signal is compensated for a waveform with a large rising and falling slope, so the output signal is closer to the original square wave. Can be output, and the influence of external noise can be reduced. However, if the slopes of rising and falling are large, the amount of voltage change momentarily becomes large, so that the radio wave radiation to the outside of the substrate may become large. On the other hand, if the output is set to a low slew rate by setting the S terminal, the rising and falling slopes are compensated for a smaller waveform and output, so compared to the normal slew rate output, it is outpatient. Although it is vulnerable to the influence of noise, the amount of instantaneous voltage change can be reduced, and it is possible to suppress the increase in radio wave radiation to the outside of the substrate.

It should be noted that it may be configured so that it is possible to set whether to enable or disable the function itself for compensating the output waveform, and to disable all the functions for compensating the output waveform. Further, the function of compensating the output waveform may be realized outside the serial-parallel conversion circuit by providing an amplifier circuit or the like outside the serial-parallel conversion circuit.

Further, in the above-mentioned normal through rate output setting, compensation is made so that the rising and falling slopes of the output waveform are larger than the rising and falling slopes of the input waveform, but the normal through rate The output setting of the above may be such that the input waveform is output as it is without compensating for the output waveform (that is, the output waveform has a rising edge equivalent to the rising edge of the input waveform as a predetermined mode). In this case, in the low slew rate output setting, it is sufficient to output a waveform whose slope is smaller than the rising edge of the input waveform.

The T terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting the timeout reset function of the signal output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23. When the T terminal is set to L (low), the timeout reset function is set to the disabled state, and when the terminal is set to H (high), the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state.

When the T terminal is set to H (high) and the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state, the clock signal and data are input from the CLK / I terminal and DATA / I terminal, and the signal output is output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23. When a predetermined period (1 second in this example) elapses after the start, the time-out is assumed, and the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are automatically reset (output stopped). Therefore, when the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state and it is desired to continuously supply signals to each LED and the operating motor from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, for example, at least from the effect control microcomputer 90120. It is necessary to repeatedly output the control signal every predetermined period (1 second in this example).

The Q / S terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting the drive method of the signal output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23. When the Q / S terminal is set to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current outputs. Further, when the Q / S terminal is set to H (high), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be the sink output.

The Q / I terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a setting terminal for setting whether or not to invert the output logic of the signal output from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23. When the Q / I terminal is set to L (low), the output logic of the output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23 is set to be normally output without being inverted. Further, when the Q / I terminal is set to H (high), the output logic of the output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23 is set to be inverted and output.

The R terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is a current reference setting terminal. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 47, the R terminal is connected to each drive output terminals A to A23 via a constant current circuit, and an arbitrary resistance value is outside between the R terminal and the ground (GND). By connecting a resistor, the drive current value of all the outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 can be set in a predetermined range (for example, 4 mA to 20 mA).

The VP terminal provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is an electrostatic protection terminal for protection. The power supply voltage used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal. That is, if the power supply voltage used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit is connected to the VP terminal, an overvoltage equal to or higher than the power supply voltage can be released. When a plurality of types of power supply voltages are used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the power supply voltage having the higher voltage value may be connected to the VP terminal.

Next, the control data format of the data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit will be described. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the control data format. The basic control data format of the data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit is composed of the common format shown in FIG. 50 (1) and the basic format shown in FIG. 50 (2).

As shown in FIG. 50 (1), the common formats are 9-bit header (HD), 4-bit device ID (ID), 5-bit decode addresses AD0 to AD4 (see FIGS. 47 and 48), and 1. It is composed of EX data of bits. The EX data is for setting whether the control data format following the common format is the basic format or the extended format described later, and EX = 0 is set in the basic format.

As shown in FIG. 50 (2), the basic format is configured to include 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23. For example, when transmitting data for LED lighting control, lighting control including LED gradation control is performed by setting 6-bit data in time series for each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23 and transmitting the data. It can be carried out.

Further, as the control data format, an extended format can be used instead of the basic format shown in FIG. 50 (2). Specifically, if EX = 1 is set in the common format shown in FIG. 50 (1), the control data format following the common format becomes the extended format shown in FIG. 50 (3).

As shown in FIG. 50 (3), the extended format is configured to include 1-bit binary data for each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23. In the extended format, since the data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is composed of 1 bit, the control data format of the data received by the serial-parallel conversion circuit can be reduced. For example, in the case of driving and controlling the operation motor using a serial-parallel conversion circuit, it is not necessary to perform gradation control or the like unlike the case of controlling the lighting of a light emitting body such as an LED. Therefore, FIG. 50 (3) It is effective to use an extended format as shown in.

Although the control data format used in the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit has been described in FIG. 50, the control data format used in the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit is, for example, common as shown in FIG. 50 (1). The difference is that the format includes 6-bit decode addresses AD0 to AD5. Further, for example, the basic format shown in FIG. 50 (2) is different in that it is shorter because it includes 6-bit data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels. Further, for example, the extended format shown in FIG. 50 (3) is different in that it is shorter because it is configured to include 1-bit binary data for each of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 for 12 channels.

Further, the serial-parallel conversion circuit is configured to disperse the output timing of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 to spread the spectrum, prevent the generation of radiation noise, and suppress radio wave radiation. .. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the output timing of signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 in the serial-parallel conversion circuit. In this embodiment, the internal oscillation clock circuit built in the serial-parallel conversion circuit outputs a 6 MHz clock signal. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51, the 6 MHz internal clock signal is used as a 1 MHz 6-phase clock signal. The drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are grouped into 6 groups of 4 channels per group to distribute the signal output timing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, group 1 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q0 to Q3, group 2 is composed of four channels of drive output terminals Q4 to Q7, and drive output terminals Q8 to Q8 to Group 3 is composed of 4 channels of Q11, group 4 is composed of 4 channels of drive output terminals Q12 to Q15, group 5 is composed of 4 channels of drive output terminals Q16 to Q19, and drive output terminals Q20 to Q23. Group 6 is composed of 4 channels. Then, as shown in FIG. 51, the drive output terminals in the same group (for example, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q3 in the group 1) have the same signal output timing, but the drive output terminals in different groups (for example). For example, the output timing is distributed between the drive output terminal Q0 of group 1 and the drive output terminal Q4) of group 2.

Although FIG. 51 describes the output timing of the signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23 in the 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, in the 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, the internal clock signal of 6 MHz is converted to 1 MHz. The clock signals are separated into three phases, and the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are grouped into three groups of four channels per group to distribute the signal output timing.

Next, a connection example in which the serial-parallel conversion circuit described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51 is used as the illuminant driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c will be described. 52 to 54 are explanatory views for explaining a connection example of the serial-parallel conversion circuit. Of these, FIG. 52 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter driver 90411 for controlling the lighting of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. Further, FIG. 53 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a motor drive driver 90412 for performing drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. Further, FIG. 54 shows a connection example when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c.

First, with reference to FIG. 52, a connection example will be described when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a light emitter driver 90411 for controlling lighting of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. As shown in FIG. 52, in this embodiment, the light emitter driver 90411 for controlling the lighting of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is realized by a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. To.

In the example shown in FIG. 52, of the decoding address input terminals AD0 to AD4, AD0 and AD1 are connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V), AD2 to AD4 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decoding address is 00011 ( The case where it is set to B) is shown. Note that FIG. 52 is an example, and since the illuminant units 9071 to 9074 include a plurality of illuminant drivers, it is assumed that a different decoding address is set for each illuminant driver.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 52, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the slew output of the clock signal and data is set to a low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the light emitter drivers 90411 for controlling the lighting of a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are all mounted on the same light emitter control board 9016C. Since the control signal is transmitted between the light emitter drivers on the same light emitter control board 9016C (transmission across the boards is not performed), it is not necessary to pay much attention to noise immunity. Therefore, by setting the slew output of the clock signal and data to a low slew rate output, the radio wave radiation from the substrate is rather suppressed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 52, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 52, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be constant current output, and the Q / I terminal is set to L (low). As a result, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to be normally output without being inverted.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 52, an external resistance having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistor of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all the outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 mA.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 52, a power supply voltage VCL (5V) is connected to the VP terminal and is protected so as to allow an overvoltage of 5V or more to escape.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 52, the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are connected to a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. In the example shown in FIG. 52, for convenience, one light emitting body is connected to each drive output terminal, but when a color LED is connected as the light emitting body, it is used for RGB. The three terminals may be configured to be connected to one color LED, or one terminal may be configured to be connected to one monochromatic LED if a monochromatic LED is used as the light emitter. .. Further, for example, a plurality of monochromatic LEDs may be connected in series to one terminal.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 52, the case where the light emitters are connected to all the terminals of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is shown, but the drive output terminals Q0 to are depending on the number and arrangement of the light emitters. If it is not necessary to use all the terminals of Q23, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a connection example in the case where the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as a motor drive driver 90412 for performing drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C will be described. As shown in FIG. 53, in this embodiment, the motor drive driver 90412 for performing drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit.

In the example shown in FIG. 53, of the decoding address input terminals AD0 to AD5, AD0 to AD2 are connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V), AD3 to AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decoding address is 000111 ( The case where it is set to B) is shown. Note that FIG. 53 is an example, and another value may be set as the decode address.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 53, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V). That is, by setting the S terminal to H (high), the slew output of the clock signal and data is set to a low slew rate output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (1), the control signal is not transmitted between the motor drive driver 90412 and the other driver, so that the S terminal is set to ground (GND). It may be connected (set to L (low)) so that the through output of the clock signal and data becomes the output of the normal slew rate.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 53, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 53, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to H (high), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 are set to be sink outputs, and the Q / I terminal is set to H (high). Therefore, the output logic of the output signal from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23 is set to be inverted and output.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 53, an external resistance having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistor of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all the outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 mA.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 53, a power supply voltage VCS (5V) is connected to the VP terminal and is protected so as to release an overvoltage of 5V or more.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 53, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the terminals of the four channels Q0 to Q3 of the group 1 having the same output timing are connected to the first operation motor 9060A. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the terminals of the four channels Q4 to Q7 of the group 2 having the same output timing are connected to the second operation motor 9060B. Further, among the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11, the terminals of the four channels Q8 to Q1 of the group 3 having the same output timing are connected to the third operation motor 9060C.

As described above, in the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, the output timings of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are distributed by being divided into three groups, groups 1 to 3. If the output timings are different between the signals output to the same operating motor, the driving accuracy of the operating motor may not be maintained. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, the signals input to the same operating motor are connected to the drive output terminals belonging to the same group, and the driving accuracy of the operating motor is increased. It prevents the situation that it becomes impossible to maintain.

On the contrary, for example, when connecting to the light emitting body of the light emitting body units 9071 to 9074 described with reference to FIG. 52, or when connecting to the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c of FIG. In the case of connecting to, the above-mentioned problem of drive accuracy does not occur, so that even if the output timings are different between the signals output to each light emitter, there is not much trouble. Therefore, when connecting the output signal from the drive output terminal to a light emitting body such as an LED, it is not necessary to pay much attention to the output timing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a connection example will be described when the serial-parallel conversion circuit is used as the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c. As shown in FIG. 54, in this embodiment, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are realized by a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit. To.

In the example shown in FIG. 54, of the decoding address input terminals AD0 to AD5, AD0 to AD3 are connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V), AD4 and AD5 are connected to the ground (GND), and the decoding address is 001111 ( The case where it is set to B) is shown. Note that FIG. 54 is an example, and since there are three illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c, it is assumed that different decoding addresses are set for each illuminant driver 90413a to 90413c.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 54, the S terminal is connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the S terminal to L (low), the slew output of the clock signal and data is set to the output of a normal slew rate. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46 (2), the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c for controlling the lighting of the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c are different from each other. Since the control signal is transmitted between the light emitter drivers mounted on the ~ 9016F and mounted on different substrates, the influence of noise is large. Therefore, by setting the through output of the clock signal and data to the output of a normal slew rate, the resistance to noise is ensured.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 54, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V). That is, the timeout reset function is set to the enabled state by setting the T terminal to H (high).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 54, both the Q / S terminal and the Q / I terminal are connected to the ground (GND). That is, by setting the Q / S terminal to L (low), the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 are set to be constant current output, and the Q / I terminal is set to L (low). As a result, the output logic of the output signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is set to be normally output without being inverted.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 54, an external resistance having a predetermined resistance value is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this embodiment, it is assumed that an external resistor of 10 kΩ is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND). In this case, for example, the drive current value of all the outputs of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 is set to 150/10 kΩ = 15 mA.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 54, a power supply voltage VDC (12V) is connected to the VP terminal. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 54, since a 12V power supply voltage (VDL) and a 5V power supply voltage (VCL, VCS) are used in the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the voltage value of 12V, whichever is higher, The power supply voltage VDC is connected to the V terminal and is protected so as to allow an overvoltage of 12V or more to escape.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 54, each drive output terminal Q0 to Q11 is connected to a plurality of light emitters as a top frame LED909a, a left frame LED909b, and a right frame LED909c. In the example shown in FIG. 54, for convenience, one light emitter is connected to each drive output terminal, or three light emitters (for example, a single color LED) that perform the same control are connected in series. Although the figure is shown, when a color LED is connected as a light emitting body, it may be configured so that three terminals for RGB are connected to one color LED.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 54, the case where the light emitters are connected to all the terminals of the drive output terminals Q0 to Q11 is shown, but the drive output terminals Q0 to are depending on the number and arrangement of the light emitters. If it is not necessary to use all the terminals of Q11, the unused terminals may be connected to the ground (GND).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, in this embodiment, the T terminals of the illuminant driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c are set to H (high), respectively, and the timeout function is effective. It is set to the state. In this embodiment, for example, the effect control microcomputer 90120 has a plurality of light emitters, a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909 b, and a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 in the effect control process process (see step S9065) described later. It outputs a control signal for lighting control of the right frame LED 909c and outputs a control signal for driving and controlling the operation motors 9060A to 9060C, but since the timeout function is set to the enabled state. If the control signal is output only once, the output signal from each drive output terminal is automatically reset after a predetermined period (1 second in this example) has elapsed, and lighting control and drive control cannot be continued. Therefore, in this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 90120 repeatedly outputs a control signal at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example) in the effect control process process (see step S9065) described later. As a result, the lighting control of the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitting body units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c can be continuously executed, or the drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C can be continued. It is controlled to execute.

In this embodiment, the timeout function is set to the enabled state as described above, and the illuminant driver 90411, the motor drive driver 90412, and the illuminant driver are set every predetermined period (1 second in this example). Since the output from the drive output terminals of 90413a to 90413c is configured to be automatically stopped, for example, the operation motors 9060A to 9060C are stopped after the drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is performed. Despite the control, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation motors 9060A to 9060C do not stop due to signal omission or malfunction, causing seizure of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C. ..

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the case where the T terminal is uniformly set to H (high) and the timeout function is set to the enabled state is shown. Not limited to this, the setting of the enabled state and the disabled state of the timeout function may be used properly according to the application. For example, for the motor drive driver, while the timeout function is set to the enabled state from the viewpoint of preventing seizure of the operation motor, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b, and the right Unlike the operating motors 9060A to 9060C, the light emitters such as the frame LED 909c do not cause problems such as seizure. Therefore, the T terminal is set to L (low) and the timeout function is set to the disabled state. May be good.

Further, in this embodiment, in order to continuously execute the lighting control and the drive control, the effect control microcomputer 90120 repeatedly outputs the control signal at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example). Although shown, it is not limited to such a control mode. For example, an output circuit (output IC) may be provided separately from the effect control microcomputer 90120 (may be provided on the effect control board 9012, or may be provided on another board such as the effect control relay board 9016A). When the effect control microcomputer 90120 outputs the control signal once, the output circuit repeatedly outputs the control signal at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example) based on the once output control signal. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the T terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V), and the T terminal is physically set to H (high) on the hardware to time out. It shows the case where the reset function is set to the enabled state, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, by connecting the T terminal to the register for setting the T terminal and changing the set value of the register by the setting signal from the microcomputer 90120 for effect control, the timeout function is enabled or disabled by software. It may be configured so that it can be set.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, an external resistance having a predetermined resistance value (10 kΩ in this example) is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND), and the drive output terminal Q0 The drive current values of all outputs of ~ Q23 and Q0 to Q11 are set to 15 mA. Here, since a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) having an internal reference resistor also exists, a serial-parallel conversion circuit having such an internal reference resistor can be used as a light emitter driver or a motor drive driver. Although it is conceivable to use an internal reference resistor, the built-in reference resistor provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit generally has a fixed drive current value (for example, fixed at 20 mA) or a large error (for example, 20 mA fixed). Error ± 30%). Therefore, in this embodiment, an external resistor is connected between the R terminal and the ground (GND) and an external reference resistor is used to set an appropriate drive current value (15 mA in this example). An error is also proposed (in this example, the error is ± 3%).

As a light emitter driver or a motor drive driver, a serial-parallel conversion circuit (integrated circuit (IC)) that can use both an internal reference resistor and an external reference resistor is used, and is configured to be used properly according to the application. You may. For example, when a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs are densely provided as in the plurality of light emitting bodies constituting the light emitting body units 9071 to 9074 shown in this embodiment, the light emission becomes sparse. Therefore, an external reference resistor may be used to reduce the error. On the other hand, when controlling the lighting of an LED that is used independently, such as for error notification, there is no such obstacle in production and an error may be slightly large. Therefore, an internal reference resistor is configured to be used. May be good.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the electrical components (in this example, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b, the right frame LED909c, and the movable member). Depending on the control means (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90120) for controlling the operation motors 9060A to 9060C for operating 9051 to 9054, and the control signal by the serial communication method from the control means. Output means (in this example, illuminant driver 90411, motor drive driver 90412,) for outputting specific signals for driving electrical components (in this example, output signals from each drive output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11). It includes a light emitter driver 90413a to 90413c). Further, the output means is a first output state in which the waveform rises according to a change mode equal to or higher than that of the input control signal when the input control signal is output to another output means (in this example, the normal output state). It is possible to set either an output state (slew rate output state) or a second output state (in this example, a low slew rate output state) in which the waveform rises according to a mode of change that is slower than the first output state. (In this example, setting the S terminal to L (low) sets it to a normal slew rate output, and setting the S terminal to H (high) sets it to a low slew rate output). Therefore, the setting can be changed according to the usage environment, and the radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed according to the setting, while the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be improved. Specifically, if the output state is set to a low slew rate, radio wave radiation from the board can be suppressed, and if the output state is set to a normal slew rate, the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be improved. ..

Further, according to this embodiment, other output means are provided in the same substrate as the output means (in this example, as shown in FIG. 42, a plurality of light emitter drivers are provided on the light emitter control board 9016C. Is mounted, and control signals are sequentially transmitted between illuminant drivers on the same illuminant control board 9016C). In this case, the output means is set to the second output state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 52, in the light emitter driver 90411 mounted on the light emitter control board 9016C, the S terminal is H (in this example). It is set to high) and is set to a low slew rate output state). Therefore, when other output means are provided in the same substrate, radio wave radiation from the substrate can be suppressed.

Further, according to this embodiment, another output means is provided on another board connected to the board on which the output means is provided via a wiring member (for example, a flexible cable or a wire harness) (for example, a flexible cable or a wire harness). In this example, as shown in FIG. 46 (2), the illuminant drivers 90413a to 90413c are mounted on different illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F, and are mounted on illuminant control boards 9016D to 9016F having different control signals. (Sequentially transmitted between the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c). In this case, the output means is set to the first output state (in this example, as shown in FIG. 54, the light emitter drivers 90413a to 90413c mounted on the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F are S. The terminal is set to L (low) and is set to the normal slew rate output state). Therefore, when another output means is provided on another substrate connected via the wiring member, the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction can be enhanced.

As described above, in this embodiment, since the circuit board generally has high noise immunity, the suppression of radio radiation is prioritized in the connection relationship in the circuit board, and the output state is set to a low through rate to obtain a gentle signal waveform. On the contrary, the wiring members (for example, flexible cables and wire harnesses) connected between the boards have low noise immunity, so in the extinction relationship between the circuit boards, the noise immunity is prioritized and the output state of the normal through rate is a square wave. The signal waveform is close to. With such a configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to increase the noise immunity of the control signal for preventing malfunction while suppressing the radiation of radio waves to the outside of the game machine.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the S terminal is connected to the power supply voltage VCS (5V) or the ground (GND), and the S terminal is physically H on the hardware. It shows the case where it is set to (high) and set to a low slew rate output state, or is set to L (low) and set to a normal slew rate output state. I can't be limited. For example, by connecting the S terminal to the register for setting the S terminal and changing the set value of the register by the setting signal from the microcomputer 90120 for effect control, the output state of a low slew rate can be obtained by software or the normal output state. It may be configured so that it can be set whether to set the output state of the slew rate.

Further, in this embodiment, control signals are transmitted between output means (in this example, a light emitter driver) mounted on the same substrate in a low slew rate output state, or output means mounted on different substrates. A case is shown in which a substrate (in this example, the illuminant control substrate 9016C to 9016F) in which only one of the control signals is transmitted according to the output state of the normal slew rate between the substrates is provided. I can't be limited. For example, when a plurality of illuminant drivers are mounted on one illuminant control board, control signals are transmitted between the illuminant drivers on the same illuminant control board among those illuminant drivers. And a device that transmits a control signal to a light emitting body driver mounted on another light emitting body control board may be mixed. In this case, for example, even if the illuminant driver is mounted on the same illuminant control board, the one that transmits the control signal between the illuminant drivers is set to the output state of a low slew rate, and another illuminant is set. Those that output control signals to the light emitter driver mounted on the control board may be configured to be set to a normal slew rate output state.

Further, even when the control signal is transmitted between the illuminant drivers mounted on the same illuminant control board, the output state is not necessarily set to a low slew rate, for example, on the illuminant control board. When the control signal output by one mounted light emitter driver is branched on the substrate, it may be set to the output state of a normal slew rate. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example in which a control signal output by one illuminant driver mounted on the illuminant control substrate is branched on the substrate.

In the modification 1 shown in FIG. 55, the control signal (clock signal and data through output) output by one illuminant driver 90413d mounted on the illuminant control board 9016G is branched on the substrate, and one of the branches is branched. The case where the control signal is transmitted to the illuminant driver 90413e on the same illuminant control board 9016G and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the illuminant driver 413f on the same illuminant control board 9016G is shown. As shown in the first modification, even on the same illuminant control board 9016G, when the control signal is branched and transmitted to other illuminant drivers 90413e and 90413f, the control signal is attenuated by the branching. It becomes more susceptible to noise. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55, the S terminal may be set to L (low) and set to a normal slew rate output state to enhance the noise immunity of the control signal.

In the second modification shown in FIG. 55, the control signal (clock signal and data through output) output by one illuminant driver 90413g mounted on the illuminant control board 9016H is branched on the substrate, and one of the branches is branched. The control signal is transmitted to the illuminant driver 90413h on the same illuminant control board 9016H, and the other branched control signal is transmitted to the illuminant driver (not shown) on the external illuminant control board (not shown). Cases are shown. As shown in the modified example 2, even when the other branched control signal is transmitted to the external substrate, the control signal is attenuated by the branch and is easily affected by noise as in the modified example 1. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55, the S terminal may be set to L (low) and set to a normal slew rate output state to enhance the noise immunity of the control signal.

Further, according to this embodiment, the output means is specified by a parallel communication method from a specific signal output unit (in this example, each driver output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) grouped into a plurality of different groups. Output signals (in this example, output signals from each driver output terminal Q0 to Q23, Q0 to Q11) (in this example, in the case of a 24-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, one group as shown in FIG. It is grouped into 6 groups of 4 channels per group. In the case of a 12-channel serial-parallel conversion circuit, it is grouped into 3 groups of 4 channels per group). The output timing of the specific signal from the specific signal output unit differs for each group (in this example, as shown in FIG. 51, the output timing of the output signals from the driver output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11 is a group. It is distributed by each). Therefore, the output timings of the signals from the drive output terminals Q0 to Q23 and Q0 to Q11 can be dispersed to spread the spectrum, prevent the generation of radiation noise, and further suppress the radio wave radiation from the substrate. ..

Further, according to this embodiment, a movable member (movable members 9051 to 9054 in this example) that performs an operation is provided. Further, the driving means for operating the movable member (in this example, the operating motors 9060A to 9060C) is driven based on the specific signal output from the specific signal output unit of the same group of the output means (in this example, the driving means). As shown in FIG. 53, signals input to the same operating motor are connected to drive output terminals belonging to the same group). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in driving accuracy of the driving means while suppressing radio wave radiation from the substrate.

Further, according to this embodiment, the output means has a stop function (in this example, a timeout function) for stopping the output of a specific signal after a lapse of a predetermined period (1 second in this example) after inputting a control signal. (In this example, the timeout function is set to the enabled state by setting the T terminal to H (high). See FIG. 48). Therefore, it is possible to avoid a malfunction due to a wiring malfunction or the like, and to stably control electrical components.

Further, according to this embodiment, the control signal continuation means for continuously outputting the control signal is provided (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 90120 is, for example, the effect control process process (see step S9065). By repeatedly outputting control signals at least every predetermined period (1 second in this example), a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter unit 9071 to 9074, a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, and a right frame LED 909c. It is controlled so that the lighting control is continuously executed and the drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is continuously executed). Therefore, control corresponding to the stop function of the output means can be realized.

Further, according to this embodiment, the output means can be set to enable or disable the stop function (in this example, the timeout function is set to the disabled state by setting the T terminal to L (low). , The timeout function is set to the enabled state by setting the T terminal to H (high). See FIG. 48). Therefore, the setting of the stop function of the output means can be changed according to the application, and the cost can be reduced by standardizing the parts.

Next, the control of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hit ball is launched based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) of a ball hitting operation handle installed at the lower right of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 901. A game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area by a launch motor or the like provided in the device. When the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A, the first starting ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 39. The starting condition is satisfied. After that, for example, the first start condition is satisfied based on the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state. In this way, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started.

When the game ball launched toward the game area passes (enters) the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. 39. Will be done. The second start condition is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 9022B. After that, for example, the second start condition is satisfied based on the fact that the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state has ended. In this way, the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is executed. When the normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the normally open state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second starting winning opening.

In the normal variable winning ball device 906B, based on the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 is "per normal symbol", the opening control and the expansion opening in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip becomes the tilt position Control is performed, and closing control or normal opening control that returns to the vertical position after a predetermined time is performed is performed. The opening control and the expansion / opening control allow the game ball to easily pass or pass through the second starting winning opening when the normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the expanded / opening state as the first variable state. The normal symbol start condition for executing the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 is established based on the fact that the game ball passing through the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. 39. After the normal symbol start condition is satisfied, for example, the normal symbol display 9020 is used based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, such as the end of the previous normal symbol game. The figure game is started. In this normal symbol game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the variable display result of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol loss".

Special when the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started, or when the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is started. Whether or not to make the variable display result of the symbol a "big hit" as a predetermined specific display result is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the fluctuation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern is the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 shown in FIG. 39. Is transmitted from to the effect control board 9012.

After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variable display, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern elapses, a definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived. Is displayed. The "left", "middle", and "right" arranged on the screen of the main image display device 905MA corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, a variable display of a decorative symbol (directed symbol) different from the special symbol is performed. The decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right" are also referred to as left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol, respectively.

In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 904B, the definite special that becomes the variable display result of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, the main image display device 905MA derives and displays a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol. As the variable display result of the special symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit" (specific display result) when the predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, and the variable display result is derived and displayed when the predetermined lost symbol is derived and displayed. It becomes "missing" (non-specific display result). Based on the variable display result being "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as a specific game state which is advantageous for the player. That is, whether or not the variable display game state is controlled corresponds to whether or not the variable display result becomes a "big hit", and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed.

When the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. As an example, the same decorative symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", so that the jackpot combination is confirmed. It suffices if the decorative pattern is derived and displayed.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened and the special variable winning ball device 907 is in the first state which is advantageous for the player. Then, during a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds) or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the large winning opening and a winning ball is generated, the large winning opening is continuously opened. A round game (also simply referred to as a "round") is executed. During the period other than the execution period of such a round game, the large winning opening is closed, and the winning ball is difficult or impossible to be generated. When a game ball enters the big winning opening, the winning ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 9023, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. The round game in the jackpot game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, "16") is reached. Therefore, in the jackpot game state, the player can obtain a large number of prize balls very easily, which is an advantageous game state for the player. The pachinko gaming machine 901 may directly pay out the game balls to be prize balls, or may give points corresponding to the number of game balls to be prize balls.

After the big hit game state ends, the game state becomes the probabilistic state based on the satisfaction of the predetermined probability change control condition, and the probability that the variable display result becomes "big hit" (big hit probability) becomes higher than the normal state. Control may take place. In the probability change state, a predetermined probability change end condition is satisfied, such as the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or the jackpot game state being started before the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until it is done. The probability variation end condition may be satisfied when the next jackpot game state is started, regardless of the number of times the variable display is executed. After the jackpot game state ends, the game state becomes the time saving state, and the time saving control may be performed in which the average variable display time becomes shorter than the normal state. In the time saving state, a predetermined time saving end condition is satisfied, such as the variable display being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or the jackpot game state being started before the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until it is done.

In the probabilistic state or the time saving state, the normal variable winning ball device 906B is placed in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) in an advantageous changing mode in which the game ball easily passes (enters) the second starting winning opening than in the normal state. And the second variable state (closed state or normally open state). For example, the normal symbol display 9020 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the variable display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is "normal". Control to improve the probability of "hit the figure" compared to the normal state, tilt control time to control the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on the variable display result being "hit the normal figure" The normal variable winning ball device 906B is changed into the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode by controlling to make the normal variable winning ball device 906B longer than in the normal state and by controlling to increase the number of tilts as compared with the normal state. Just do it. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. As described above, the control for changing the ordinary variable winning ball device 906B into the first variable state and the second variable state in the advantageous change mode is referred to as "high open control" (also referred to as "high base control"). By being controlled to such a probabilistic state or a time saving state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened, and a "special game state" ("advantageous game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is achieved. Also called "state"). Even when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the high opening control may not be performed.

In the main image display device 905MA, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) are stopped in a state of being consistent with the jackpot combination for a predetermined time. A big hit occurs before the final result is displayed due to shaking, enlargement / reduction or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols being swapped. The effect performed in a state where the possibility continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as "reach state") is referred to as "reach effect". In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as "reach mode". Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called "reach variable display". A plurality of types of reach modes are prepared in advance according to the variation pattern of the decorative pattern, and the possibility that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (big hit expectation) differs depending on the reach mode. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed. The reach effect may include a normal reach effect and a super reach effect that has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect. Then, if the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA is not a jackpot combination, a “miss” occurs and the variable display state ends.

A variable display of a decorative pattern is performed as an effect of a liquid crystal display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. In addition, on the screen of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, for example, an effect using a character image and an effect of displaying a broadcast image based on a jackpot determination and a variation pattern determination result are executed. To. Various effects performed during variable display in which special symbols and decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner are also referred to as "effects during variable display". As an example of the effect during variable display, there is a possibility that the variable display state of the decorative symbol will be in the reach state, the possibility that the reach effect of the super reach will be executed, and the variable display due to the effect operation different from the variable display operation of the decorative symbol. A notice effect may be executed to suggest to the player in advance that the result may be a "big hit".

The effect operation that becomes the advance notice effect is the variable display state of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in all of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". Is executed (started) before the reach state is reached (before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right"). Further, the advance notice effect for notifying that the variable display result may be a "big hit" may include one executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state. In this way, the notice effect can be in the big hit game state at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to the derivation of the finalized special symbol or the confirmed decorative symbol that is the variable display result. Anything that can foretell sex will do. A plurality of advance notice effect patterns are prepared in advance according to the content (effect mode) of the effect operation when the advance notice effect is executed.

When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B and the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" ("normal"). It includes a case where the variable display mode is "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") and a case where the variable display mode is "reach loss". When the variable display mode is "non-reach", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not become the reach state, and a predetermined combination of decorative symbols that does not reach the reach (non-reach). Reach combination) is displayed (derived) as a stop. When the variable display mode is "reach", the reach effect is executed after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and then the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, and finally the jackpot combination is A combination of predetermined decorative symbols (reach loss combination) that does not become is stopped and displayed (derived).

The game balls used as a game medium in the pachinko game machine 901 and the recorded information of the scores given according to the number thereof may have valuable value that can be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes according to the quantity, for example. Just do it. Alternatively, the recorded information of these game balls and scores may have valuable value that can be used for another game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, although it cannot be exchanged for a special prize or a general prize.

Further, the game value that can be given by the pachinko game machine 901 is not limited to paying out the game ball as a prize ball and giving a score, for example, controlling to a big hit game state or a special game state such as a probability change state. Controlling, the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the number of first rounds (for example, "15") that is larger than the number of second rounds (for example, "7"), and it can be executed in a time-saving state. The upper limit of the variable display is the first number (for example, "100"), which is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The number of consecutive chans, which is the first probability (for example, 1/20) and the number of times that the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled in the normal state, is larger than the number of consecutive chans (for example, "5"). It may include a more favorable gaming situation for the player, such as part or all of the number of first consecutive chans (eg, "10").

For example, NAND-ROM is used as a part or all of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C mounted on the effect control board 9012 as shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, and by a ROM writer which is a data writing device. The stored contents may be rewritable. Such a rewritable memory may include a data area and a redundant area. The data area stores programs and data for executing various processes in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901. The redundant area has an alternative area to be used in place of the defective area in the data area. The CPU 90130 and VDP 90140 execute various processes based on the data stored in the data area and the data stored in the alternative area used in place of the defective area generated in the data area. The history information of the memory may be stored in such a redundant area of the memory. The history information may be any information related to memory recycling. As an example, the history information may include at least one of model identification information such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 whose memory has been used so far and date information. In addition, the history information may include store identification information for each game store whose memory has been used so far. By storing the history information in the redundant area of the memory in this way, it is not necessary to attach a barcode or the like for recycling management to the outside of the memory, and the memory is accurately recycled based on the history information stored in the memory. Can be managed. Since the history information is stored in the redundant area, the history information does not affect the data area normally used, and the identity of the program and data can be ensured.

Alternatively, the rewritable memory may include a control area for storing correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the defective area in the data area and the alternative area in the redundant area. The control area may store the arrangement information indicating the storage position of the history information in the redundant area. Alternatively, a memory control unit that stores correspondence information and reads data based on the correspondence information is built in the memory, and this memory control unit is arranged to indicate the storage position of the history information in the redundant area. Information may be stored. In this way, by storing the correspondence information indicating the correspondence between the defective area in the data area and the alternative area in the redundant area and the arrangement information indicating the storage position of the history information, the data can be read out to the alternative area. Similarly, it is possible to appropriately manage the reading of history information.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described.

On the main board 9011, when the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is started, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, RAM 101 is cleared. In addition, the register of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set. As a result, after that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, interrupts are permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, the process for returning the internal state of the pachinko game machine 901 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 90103 that executes such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main side error processing, information output processing, game random number update processing, game control process processing, ordinary symbol process processing, command control processing, and other games in the pachinko gaming machine 901. It includes processing to control the progress of.

The switch process is a process of determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as a gate switch 9021, a first start port switch 9022A, a second start port switch 9022B, and a count switch 9023 via a switch circuit 90110. The error processing on the main side is a processing in which an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the side of the main board 9011 by software.

In the game control process process included in the game control timer interrupt process, the value of the game process flag provided in the RAM 90102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 901, and the first special symbol display device 904A or Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation of the second special symbol display device 904B and to set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 907 according to a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process processing controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 9020, and sets the variable display of the normal symbol and the tilting operation of the movable wing piece on the normal variable winning ball device 906B. It is a process that enables.

The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 9011 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 9012. As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 90105, for the effect control board 9012, corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 90102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, set the predetermined control data in the output port of the effect control INT signal to turn the effect control INT signal on for a predetermined time and then turn it off. By doing so, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control process processing. In the game control process processing shown in FIG. 56, the CPU 90103 of the game control microcomputer 90100 first determines whether or not a start winning prize has occurred (step S9011). As an example, in step S9011, the input state (on or off) of the start winning signal, which is the detection signal transmitted from the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B, is checked, and if it is on, the start is started. It may be determined that a prize has been generated.

If a start winning is generated in step S9011 (step S9011; Yes), a random number at the time of winning is stored (step S9012). As an example, in the process of step S9012, a random number circuit 90104 built in (or externally attached) to the game control microcomputer 90100, a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100, and a game control microcomputer. A game random number (random number value for determining variable display result, game state determination) updated by at least a part of a random counter configured by using an internal register provided separately from the RAM 90102 in the computer 90100. Part or all of the numerical data indicating the random number value (random number value, random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern) is extracted. The random number value extracted at this time may be stored as hold data associated with the hold number in, for example, a hold random number value storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100.

Following the process of step S9012, various control commands corresponding to the start winning prize are transmitted (step S9013). As an example, in the process of step S9013, the setting for transmitting the start prize designation command for notifying the occurrence of the start prize to the effect control board 9012 may be made. When the start winning is not generated in step S9011 (step S9011; No), or after the process of step S9013 is executed, the value of the game process flag is determined (step S9021). Then, the process according to the determination value is selected and executed from the plurality of processes described in advance in the computer program for game control.

For example, when the value of the game process flag is "0", it is determined whether or not the variable display of the symbol (variable display game) can be started (step S90101). As an example, in the process of step S90101, it is determined whether or not the number of holds of the variable display game is "0" by checking the stored contents of the hold random number value storage unit. At this time, if the number of holds is other than "0", the variable display is started because the variable display is held after the start condition of the variable display is satisfied and the start condition is not yet satisfied. Judge that it is possible. On the other hand, when the number of holdings is "0", it is determined that the variable display cannot be started. When the variable display cannot be started (step S90101; No), the game control process process is terminated.

When the variable display can be started in step S90101 (step S90101; Yes), the definite symbol to be derived and displayed as the variable display result is determined (step S90102). The variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game is called "special figure display result". In the process of step S90102, the game random number (random number value for determining the variable display result, the random number value for determining the game state, and the fluctuation) stored at the beginning (the storage area having the smallest hold number) in the hold random number value storage unit. Read the random number value for pattern determination, etc.). The game random number read from the hold random number value storage unit may be temporarily stored in a variable display random number buffer or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100. Then, using the random value for determining the variable display result and the variable display result determination table, it is determined at a predetermined ratio whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit". Here, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the probabilistic state, the variable display result determination table is determined so that the variable display result is determined as a "big hit" at a higher rate than in the normal state or the time saving state. It suffices if the judgment value in is set.

When the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" in the process of step S90102, the game state after the end of the big hit game state is said to be a probabilistic state by further using the random number value for determining the game state and the game state determination table. Decide whether or not to enter the special game state. Corresponding to these determination results, a definite symbol to be derived and displayed as a variable display result may be determined.

Following the process in step S90102, the internal flags and the like are set (step S90103). As an example, in the process of step S90103, when the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" in the process of step S90102, the big hit flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100 is turned on. set. Further, when it is determined that the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is set to the probabilistic state, the probabilistic confirmation flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set to the on state. , It may be identifiable that it will be in a probabilistic state. After that, the value of the game process flag is updated to "1" (step S90104), and then the game control process process is terminated.

When the value of the game process flag is "1", the fluctuation pattern and the like are determined (step S90111). FIG. 57 shows a setting example of a fluctuation pattern used in the pachinko gaming machine 901. Each variation pattern shows the required time (variable display time) from the start of the variable display to the derivation display of the definite symbol that is the variable display result, and the outline of the effect mode can be specified. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the main image display device 905MA is "non-reach" and the case where it is "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each of the above and when the variable display result is a "big hit". As the fluctuation pattern, a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance for each fluctuation time (variable display time) in the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative symbol. Therefore, the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol can be determined by determining the variation pattern.

In the process of step S90111, the variation pattern to be used is determined at a predetermined ratio by using the variation pattern determination random number value temporarily stored in the variable display random number buffer and the variation pattern determination table. At this time, by making the determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern different depending on whether or not the variable display result is determined as "big hit", there is a possibility that the variable display result becomes "big hit" corresponding to each fluctuation pattern. (Big hit reliability) can be different.

Further, in the process of step S9011, it may be determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to "reach" by determining the variation pattern when the variable display result is determined to be "missing". .. Alternatively, before determining the fluctuation pattern, it may be determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to "reach" by using the reach determination random value and the reach determination table. That is, in the process of step S9011, it suffices that the fluctuation pattern can be determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the variable display result and the determination result of the presence / absence of reach.

Following the process of step S90111, various control commands corresponding to the start of variable display are transmitted (step S90112). As an example, in the process of step S90112, as the variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display, the variable display result notification command for notifying the variable display result, the variable display time of the decorative symbol, the type of reach effect, and the like are variablely displayed. Settings may be made to send a variation pattern specification command or the like that notifies the variation pattern indicating the mode. Further, in response to the decrease in the number of holds due to the start of the variable display, a setting may be made to send a hold number notification command for notifying the number of holds after the decrease.

The variable display time is set in response to the determination of the variation pattern by the process of step S90112. In addition, a setting may be made to start variable display of the special symbol by either the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B. As an example, variable display of symbols may be started by transmitting a predetermined drive signal to either the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B. Which special symbol display device uses the special symbol to execute the special symbol game is based on which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed. It may be set accordingly. More specifically, a special symbol game is played by the first special symbol display device 904A based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first start winning opening. On the other hand, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the second start winning opening, a special figure game is played by the second special symbol display device 904B. After that, the value of the game process flag is updated to "2" (step S90113), and then the game control process process is terminated.

When the value of the game process flag is "2", it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (step S90121). Then, if the variable display time has not elapsed (step S90112; No), the variable display control of the special symbol is performed (step S90122), and then the game control process process is terminated. On the other hand, when the variable display time has elapsed (step S90121; Yes), the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, and control is performed to derive and display the finalized symbol (step S90123).

Following the process of step S90123, various control commands corresponding to the end of the variable display are transmitted (step S90124). As an example, in the process of step S90124, a variable display end command for instructing the end (stop) of the variable display and a big hit start specification command (fanfare command) for designating the start of the big hit game state when the variable display result is "big hit". ) Etc. may be set to be transmitted.

After executing the process of step S90124, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" (step S90125). Then, when the variable display result is "big hit" (step S90125; Yes), the value of the game process flag is updated to "3" (step S90126), and then the game control process process is terminated. On the other hand, if the variable display result is "missing" instead of "big hit" (step S90125; No), the game process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to "0" (step). S90127), the game control process processing is terminated. When the process of step S90127 is executed, it is determined whether or not to end the probability change state or the time saving state, and when it is determined to end based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, these gaming states are terminated. Settings for controlling to the normal state may be made.

When the value of the game process flag is "3", it is determined whether or not to end the big hit game state depending on whether or not the predetermined big hit end condition is satisfied (step S90131). The jackpot end condition may be, for example, that all the rounds executed in the jackpot game state have been completed. If the jackpot game state is not terminated (step S90131; No), the game motion control at the time of jackpot is performed (step 132), and then the game control process process is terminated. On the other hand, when ending the big hit gaming state (step S90113; Yes), a setting for controlling the gaming state after the big hit ending is made (step S90133).

As an example, in the process of step S90133, it is determined whether or not the probability change confirmation flag is on, and if it is on, the probability change flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100 is turned on. Set to. As a result, when it is decided that the variable display result is "big hit" and it is decided that the game state after the end of the big hit game state is the probabilistic state, the game corresponds to this decision result. The state can be controlled to a probabilistic state. Even when controlling to a time saving state, a setting corresponding to this may be made. After that, the game process flag is cleared, the value is initialized to "0" (step S90134), and then the game control process process is terminated.

Next, the operation on the effect control board 9012 will be described. The effect control board 9012 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like. In the effect control microcomputer 90120 in which the power supply for activation is started, the CPU 90130 executes the effect control main process.

In this embodiment, in the effect control main process, the memory inspection process may be executed when a predetermined memory inspection condition is satisfied. The memory inspection process is a determination process for determining whether or not the programs and data stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are normal. In the memory inspection process, by executing the checksum process as the determination process, the stored contents of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are inspected, and the checksum as the inspection result can be displayed. Further, the effect control main process includes a process for controlling the effect by various effect devices, such as an effect control process process executed based on the occurrence of a timer interrupt for effect control.

Further, in the effect control main process, the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 may be confirmed by satisfying a predetermined origin confirmation condition. The origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 are, for example, positions corresponding to the retracted state as shown in FIG. 38 (A), and the movable members 9051 and 9052 are arranged above the main image display device 905MA, respectively. Each of the movable members 9053 and 9054 may be predetermined as a position to be arranged below the main image display device 905MA. When the origin confirmation condition is satisfied, the initial operation of the movable members 9051 to 9054 is executed, and control is performed to set each of the movable members 9051 to 9054 as the origin position. At this time, based on the result of detecting the position of the movable member 9051 to 9054 by the movable member position sensor 9061, it is confirmed whether or not the movable member 9051 to 9054 can be stopped at the origin position. Then, if the vehicle cannot be stopped at the origin position, an abnormality notification is performed assuming that an origin abnormality has occurred.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process executed by the CPU 90130. In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58, the CPU 90130 first confirms the connection state of the substrate (step S9051). In step S9051, for example, it is specified whether or not the effect control board 9012 is connected to the main board 9011 and whether or not the effect control board 9012 is connected to the effect control relay board 9016A. In order to confirm the connection with the main board 9011, the CPU 90130 may determine whether or not the initialization command or the power recovery command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received after starting the time counting by the internal timer. Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of timekeeping without receiving the initialization command or the power recovery command, it may be determined that the effect control board 9012 and the main board 9011 are not connected.

FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B) show a configuration example for connecting the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A. As shown in FIG. 59 (A), the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are physically connected to the effect control board 9012 by inserting a connector (plug) provided at one end of the harness HN1. And a connector (socket) CN1 for electrical connection is provided. As shown in FIG. 59 (B), the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are formed by inserting a connector (plug) provided at the other end of the harness HN1 into the effect control relay board 9016A. A connector (socket) CN2 for physically and electrically connecting the two is provided. The harness HN1 may be configured by bundling a large number of wiring cables. The connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012 includes terminals TM01 to TM24. The connector CN11 provided on the effect control relay board 9016A includes terminals TN01 to TN24. The terminals TM01 to TM24 included in the connector CN01 and the terminals TN01 to TN24 included in the connector CN11 have terminals having corresponding numbers (for example, terminal TM01 and terminal TN01) when the harness HN1 is attached to the connector CN01 and the connector CN11. Any relationship may be physically and electrically connected.

FIG. 59C shows an example of setting input / output contents corresponding to terminals TM01 to TM24 included in the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012. The terminals TM01 to TM24 included in the connector CN01 can provide various voltages such as ground (GND), VSL (rectifying and smoothing AC24V), VDC (DC12V), and VCL (DC5V). Further, the terminals TM01 to TM24 are connected to terminals TM03 and TM04 for supplying data signals and clock signals for driver ICs mounted on the drive control boards 9016B and the light emitter control boards 9016C to 9016F, and various data in a serial signal system. Terminals TM05 to TM08 for transmitting and receiving are included. Further, the signal SM1 used for confirming the connection with the effect control relay board 9016A can be input to the terminal TM22 among the terminals TM01 to TM24. As shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B), the VCL voltage output from the terminals TM20 and TM21 of the connector CN01 is the terminal of the connector CN11 provided on the effect control relay board 9016A via the harness HN1. It is supplied to TN20 and TN21. The terminals TN20 to TN22 of the connector CN11 may be short-circuited on the substrate of the effect control relay substrate 9016A. Therefore, when the harness HN1 is connected, a voltage corresponding to VCL is supplied from the terminal TN22 of the connector CN11 to the terminal TM22 of the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012 via the harness HN1. To. On the other hand, when the harness HN1 is not connected and is not connected, the voltage is not supplied to the terminal TM22 of the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012.

In step S9051 shown in FIG. 58, in order to confirm the connection state with the effect control relay board 9016A, the CPU 90130 determines the input state of the signal SM1 at the terminal TM22 of the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012. Then, if the signal SM1 is in a high voltage state corresponding to VCL, it is determined that the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected via the harness HN1. On the other hand, if the signal SM1 is in a low voltage state corresponding to the non-supply of voltage, it is determined that the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected. In this way, the connection state between the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A may be confirmed based on the voltage at the terminal TM22 which is the connection confirmation terminal.

Based on the confirmation result of the connection state in step S9051, it is determined whether or not there is a connection with the effect control relay board 9016A (step S9052). In step S9052, when the signal SM1 at the terminal TM22 is in a high voltage state corresponding to VCL, it is determined that there is a connection with the effect control relay board 9016A, whereas the signal SM1 at the terminal TM22 corresponds to no voltage supply. When it is in a low voltage state, it may be determined that there is no connection with the effect control relay board 9016A. If it is determined in step S9052 that there is no connection (step S9052; No), the relay non-connection flag is set to the on state (step S9053). If the relay unconnected flag is prepared in advance in a predetermined area (such as an effect control flag setting unit) of the work memory 90131 built in the effect control microcomputer 90120 or the RAM 90122 externally attached to the effect control microcomputer 90120. Good. If it is determined in step S9052 that there is a connection, the relay unconnected flag is maintained in the off state by not executing the process of step S9053.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not there is a connection with the main board 9011 based on the confirmation result of the connection state in step S9051 (step S9054). In step S9054, if an initialization command or a power recovery command is received before the predetermined time elapses from the start of timing, it is determined that there is a connection with the main board 9011, whereas the initialization command or the power recovery command is used. When a predetermined time elapses without reception, it may be determined that there is no connection with the main board 9011. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the one that determines the presence / absence of connection according to the presence / absence of command reception, and is mainly based on the voltage at the predetermined terminal that serves as the connection confirmation terminal, as in the connection state with the effect control relay board 9016A. It may be determined whether or not there is a connection with the substrate 9011. If it is determined in step S9054 that there is no connection (step S9054; No), the memory inspection process (step S9055) is executed, and then the loop process is executed to wait.

In this embodiment, when power supply is started in a state where a harness that binds cables as command lines for transmitting various control signals between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 is not connected. , The memory inspection condition is satisfied, and the memory inspection process is executed in step S9055. On the other hand, when the power supply is started with the harness connected between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012, the memory inspection condition is not satisfied and the memory inspection process in step S9055 is not executed. In this way, the memory inspection condition is satisfied when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is turned on with the cable (harness) which is the command line attached between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 removed. You may do so.

The memory inspection condition is not limited to the one that is satisfied when the power is turned on with the command line removed. For example, the memory inspection condition is satisfied when the power is turned on while the push button 9031B is pressed. There may be. Alternatively, for example, the memory inspection condition may be satisfied by turning on the power with the openable and closable game machine frame 903 open. In addition, the memory inspection condition may be satisfied by detecting an arbitrary predetermined state.

In the memory inspection process of step S9055, a checksum calculation or the like using the stored data of the ROM 90121 or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is performed, and the calculation result or the like may be displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. When the memory inspection process is executed, the power switch of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is turned off once, and then the power switch is turned on again with the cable (harness) as the command line connected. It suffices to make the control executable. Alternatively, by connecting a cable (harness) as a command line and pressing the reset switch, it may be possible to control the effect without turning on the power again. Alternatively, after the power switch of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is once turned off, the power is turned on while the push button 9031B is not pressed, so that the effect control can be executed. In addition, when a predetermined effect control condition is satisfied, the process may proceed to step S9056 so that the effect control can be executed.

If it is determined in step S9054 that there is a connection (step S9054; Yes), the initial setting process (step S9056) is executed. In the initial setting process of step S9056, for example, the storage area in the RAM 90122 is cleared, various initial values are set, and the CTC (counter and timer circuit) register setting for generating a timer interrupt for effect control is performed. This initial setting process may include an effect data transfer process. The effect data transfer process includes predetermined data (binary code constituting the program module, etc.) among the programs and data stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C and used for executing the effect by various effect devices. (Including) may be a process for transferring to RAM 90122, VRAM 90141, or the like. Further, in the initial setting process, the execution control of the initial operation by the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 may be performed together with the transfer of the effect data by the effect data transfer process. The initial operation performed at this time is, for example, an operation of changing (moving) the movable members 9051 to 9054 from the retracted state to the advanced state, stopping the movable members in the advanced state until a predetermined time elapses, and then returning to the retracted state. And so on.

After executing the initial setting process in step S9056, it is determined whether or not the relay unconnected flag is on (step S9057). When the relay non-connection flag is off (step S9057; No), the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the like are confirmed corresponding to the state in which the relay board 9016A for effect control is connected (step S9057; No). Step S9058). In this case, it is determined whether or not there is an origin abnormality (step S9059), and if there is an origin abnormality (step S9059; Yes), the origin abnormality is notified (step S9060), and the process returns to step S9058. After notifying the origin abnormality in step S9060, the process may proceed to step S9061.

In step S9058, for example, in order to confirm the origin position of the movable members 9051 to 9054, a detection signal by the movable member position sensor 9061 is acquired as a position detection signal of the movable members 9051 to 9054. The detection signal by the movable member position sensor 9061 indicates the result of detecting the position of the movable member 9051 to 9054. In the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 59 (A), the signal input to the terminal TM07 for serial reception may include the detection signal by the movable member position sensor 9061. By confirming the detection signal by the movable member position sensor 9061 acquired by the general-purpose output controller 90145, the CPU 90130 determines whether or not the movable members 9051 to 9054 are at the origin position based on the position detection signals of the movable members 9051 to 9054. I just need to be able to confirm. The notification of the origin abnormality by step S9060 is, for example, an image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, a right frame LED 909c or a sky It can be executed by lighting a notification lamp provided separately from the frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c, a notification operation using other production devices, or a combination of a part or all of them. It should be. Further, the signal output from the specific terminal provided on the effect control board 9012 may be in a different output state depending on the presence or absence of the origin abnormality. As described above, the abnormality notification of the movable member may be feasible by controlling an arbitrary output.

When it is determined in step S9057 that the relay non-connection flag is on, the connector CN01 provided on the effect control board 9012 is connected to the connector CN11 provided on the harness HN1 and the effect control relay board 9016A. There is no effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A is not connected. In this case, the terminal TM07 of the connector CN01 does not receive the detection signal input by the movable member position sensor 9061. Therefore, even if the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 are confirmed, it is determined that there is an origin abnormality, and the abnormality notification is executed. In particular, in the manufacturing stage and the development stage, for the purpose of confirming the operation of the effect control microcomputer 90120, for example, the power is turned on when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected. is there. In order to prevent such frequent occurrence of abnormality notification in the manufacturing stage and the development stage and improve work efficiency, steps S9058 to S9060 are performed in response to the determination in step S9057 that the relay unconnected flag is on. Do not run. As a result, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected, the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 are not confirmed, and the abnormality notification due to the occurrence of the origin abnormality is not executed. ..

When it is determined in step S9057 that the relay non-connection flag is on (step S9057; Yes), or when it is determined in step S9059 that there is no origin abnormality (step S9059; No), the effect control main In the process, the effect random number update process (step S9061) is executed, and the numerical data indicating the random number value to be the effect random number is updated by the software. The effect random numbers are counted as various random number values used for effect control. It should be noted that the random number for effect that is updated by the hardware using the random number circuit built in (or externally attached) to the effect control microcomputer 90120 does not have to be updated in the effect random number update process. Alternatively, the production random number may be updated by software using numerical data indicating a random number value updated by hardware.

After executing the effect random number update process in step S9061, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9062). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state when a timer interrupt for effect control occurs. When it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9062; Yes), after the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S9063), the command analysis process (step S9064) and the effect control process After executing the process (step S9065) in sequence, the process returns to the process of step S9061. The command analysis process in step S9064 and the effect control process process in step S9065 are included in the timer interrupt process for effect control. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is off (step S9062; No), the process returns to step S9061 without executing the processes of steps S9063 to S9065.

FIG. 60 shows an execution example of abnormality notification in step S9060 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58. In the execution example shown in FIG. 60, the occurrence of an origin abnormality is notified by displaying an image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. At this time, which of the upper mechanism (upper accessory) and the lower mechanism (lower accessory) of the effect movable mechanism 9050 is abnormal based on the position detection signal indicating the detection result by the movable member position sensor 9061? An error message that can identify is displayed. In this way, the movable member is in a notification mode in which the clerk of the amusement park or the like can recognize which type of accessory is abnormal among the plurality of types of accessory configured by using the plurality of movable members. Abnormality notification may be performed.

The display screen of the main image display device 905MA is difficult to see or cannot be seen when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are in the advanced state. Therefore, when the abnormality notification of the movable member is performed by displaying the image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, the clerk of the amusement park or the like may have difficulty or cannot recognize the occurrence of the abnormality. Therefore, along with the image display by the main image display device 905MA or the like, or instead of the image display, an abnormality notification of the movable member is performed by using a notification unit that can be visually recognized regardless of the state of the upper mechanism or the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050. May be done. As such a notification unit, for example, it is provided at the upper position, the left position, and the right position of the game machine frame 903, and is included in the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b, and the right frame LED909c, or the top frame LED909a or the left A plurality of notification light emitting members provided separately from the frame LED 909b and the right frame LED 909c may be used. These notification light emitting members may be configured by using, for example, LEDs. Abnormality notification of movable members is performed in a notification mode that allows a game hall clerk or the like to recognize which type of accessory has an abnormality depending on the combination of lighting modes by a plurality of notification light emitting members. It may be. As an example, when the notification unit includes the first notification light emitting member and the second notification light emitting member, in step S9060 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58, an abnormality occurs in the upper mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050. For example, the lighting control of the notification unit may be performed so that the first notification light emitting member lights up, while the second notification light emitting member lights up when an abnormality occurs in the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050. In this way, by performing abnormality notification of the movable member using a notification unit that can be recognized regardless of the state of the movable member, even if there is a configuration in which recognition is difficult or unrecognizable depending on the state of the movable member, the movable member It is possible to identifiablely notify that an abnormality has occurred in the moving member and which movable member has an abnormality.

The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 can execute interrupt processing for command reception in addition to the timer interrupt process for effect control, and can execute the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015. , It suffices if it can be obtained from the host interface 90132. The effect control command acquired at this time may be temporarily stored in a reception command buffer provided in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122, for example. In the command analysis process of step S9064, it is determined whether or not the effect control command has been received, and if it is received, the setting and control corresponding to the received command are performed. In the effect control process process of step S9065, for example, the image display for effect on the screen of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are arranged. Lighting in a plurality of arranged light emitting bodies, lighting in various light emitting members such as a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, a right frame LED 909c, and a decorative LED different from the light emitting body units 9071 to 9074, and moving movable members 9051 to 9054. The operation control contents using various effect devices such as the drive operation of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C are determined, determined, and set according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 9011.

FIG. 61 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9055 of FIG. 58 as the memory inspection process. In the memory inspection process, as the checksum calculation using the stored data of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, the first checksum calculation using the stored data in the plurality of storage areas provided in the ROM 90121 and the stored data in the ROM 90121 The second checksum calculation using all of the above, the third checksum calculation using the stored data in the plurality of storage areas provided in the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and all the stored data in the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. Of the fourth checksum operation using the above, some or all of the operations may be executed. In this embodiment, after the second checksum operation is executed following the first checksum operation, the operation using all of the stored data in each of the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is executed as the fourth checksum operation. Then, each calculation result and the like are displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA.

In the memory inspection process shown in FIG. 61A, the CPU 90130 first sets the memory inspection setting table (step S90201). The memory check setting table is a table for setting the checksum calculation start address and the calculation end address by the checksum calculation. The table data constituting the memory inspection setting table may be stored in advance in a predetermined area (for example, the first storage area) of the ROM 90121, for example.

FIG. 61B shows a configuration example of the memory inspection setting table. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 61B, the checksum calculation start address and the calculation end address are specified corresponding to each of the display times "0" to "5". The number of times of display is the number of times that the checksum is displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, and after "0" is set as the initial value, 1 is added each time the calculation result by the checksum calculation is displayed. It should be.

Following the setting in step S90201 shown in FIG. 61 (A), the number of impressions is set to "0" (step S90202). For example, in step S90202, the count value of the number of impressions may be set to "0" by clearing (initializing) the counter for the number of impressions prepared in advance. The display count counter may be configured by using the built-in register of the CPU 90130, or may be configured by using a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122 (such as an effect control counter setting unit).

After that, the parameter corresponding to the number of impressions is set (step S90203). For example, in step S90203, the clear data is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. In addition, the checksum calculation end address is set so that it can be compared with the address indicated by the pointer. These parameters may be set in a plurality of registers built in the CPU 90130, or may be set in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122.

The checksum is calculated using the parameters set in step S90203 (step S90204). For example, in step S90204, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the stored data at the addresses of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C indicated by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored as new stored data in the checksum data area, and it is determined whether or not the address indicated by the value of the pointer has reached the calculation end address. If the calculation end address has not been reached, the pointer value is added by 1, and the process returns to the process of calculating the exclusive OR. When the calculation end address is reached, a checksum using the stored data from the calculation start address to the calculation end address can be obtained by inverting the value of each bit that is the content of the checksum data area. ..

Along with the checksum calculation in step S90204, it is determined whether or not the relay non-connection flag is on (step S90205), and if the relay non-connection flag is on (step S90205; Yes), the calculation according to the number of impressions. The content is updated and displayed (step S90206). Therefore, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected, the checksum calculation execution result and the like are controlled so as to be displayable. On the other hand, if the relay non-connection flag is off (step S90205; No), the process of step S90206 is not executed. As a result, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected, the checksum calculation execution result and the like are controlled so as not to be displayed. The determination result by the determination process for determining whether or not the effect data stored in the ROM 90121 or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is normal by updating and displaying the calculation content in step S90206 is referred to as the main image display device 905MA. It can be displayed on the display device.

After that, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculation is completed (step S90207), and if it is not completed (step S90207; No), the process returns to step S90204 to continue the checksum calculation. When the calculation is completed in step S90207 (step S90207; Yes), after adding 1 to the number of impressions (step S90208), it is determined whether or not the number of impressions has reached the end determination value (step S90209). ). By setting, for example, "6" in advance as the end determination value, it is possible to display six checksum calculation results corresponding to the settings of the memory inspection setting table as shown in FIG. 61 (B). it can. If the end determination value has not been reached (step S90209; No), the process returns to step S90203, and if the end determination value is reached, the memory inspection process is terminated.

FIG. 62 shows a display example of the calculation result on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. In this display example, as the checksum calculation result corresponding to the setting of the memory inspection setting table as shown in FIG. 61 (B), there are three types of "program ROM" corresponding to ROM 90121 (A) to (C). The calculation results and the like are displayed, and three types of calculation results and the like (A) to (C) are displayed for the "data ROM" corresponding to the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. Further, in the display example of FIG. 62, the progress status (completion rate) of the checksum calculation and the presence or absence of an abnormality based on the calculation result are displayed so as to be confirmed. (A) of the "program ROM" shown in FIG. 62 corresponds to the calculation start address MA00 and the calculation end address MA01 set when the number of impressions is "0" in the memory inspection setting table shown in FIG. 61 (B). Then, it is shown that the checksum is calculated by using the storage data of the first storage area in which the program for effect control and various management data are stored in the ROM 90121. (B) of the "program ROM" shown in FIG. 62 corresponds to the calculation start address MA02 and the calculation end address MA10 set when the number of impressions is "1" in the memory inspection setting table shown in FIG. 61 (B). Therefore, it is shown that the checksum is calculated by using the stored data in the second storage area in which the audio data is stored in the ROM 90121. (C) of the "program ROM" shown in FIG. 62 corresponds to the calculation start address MA00 and the calculation end address MA10 set when the number of impressions is "2" in the memory inspection setting table shown in FIG. 61 (B). Therefore, it is shown that the checksum is calculated by using all the stored data in the ROM 90121. (A) of the “data ROM” shown in FIG. 62 corresponds to the calculation start address MA10 + 1 and the calculation end address MA20 set when the number of impressions is “3” in the memory inspection setting table shown in FIG. 61 (B). Therefore, it is shown that the checksum is calculated by using all the stored data in the effect data memory 90123A. (B) of the “data ROM” shown in FIG. 62 corresponds to the calculation start address MA20 + 1 and the calculation end address MA30 set when the number of impressions is “4” in the memory inspection setting table shown in FIG. 61 (B). Therefore, it is shown that the checksum is calculated by using all the stored data in the effect data memory 90123B. (C) of the “data ROM” shown in FIG. 62 corresponds to the calculation start address MA30 + 1 and the calculation end address MA40 set when the number of impressions is “5” in the memory inspection setting table shown in FIG. 61 (B). Therefore, it is shown that the checksum is calculated by using all the stored data in the effect data memory 90123C.

The checksum calculation result differs depending on the contents of the stored data in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. For example, when the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C are non-volatile semiconductor memories such as EEPROM or NAND-ROM that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C can be used. Different checksum calculation results can be obtained depending on the stored effect control program and various data versions. By executing the memory inspection process as shown in FIG. 61A and displaying the checksum calculation result on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, the ROM 90121 is displayed at the manufacturing stage and the development stage of the pachinko gaming machine 901. And the version of the effect control program and various data stored in the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C can be easily confirmed. This facilitates version control of the stored data in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and can surely prevent inconsistency between the program for effect control and the version such as audio data and image data. In addition to the checksum calculation result, version information indicating the version of the effect control program and various data may be displayed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. The version information may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 90121 or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. By displaying the version information together with the checksum calculation result, it is easier to check the version of the program for effect control and various data, and by reading the checksum corresponding to the version, is there an error in the stored data? It can be easily confirmed whether or not it is.

Note that the stored data used for the checksum calculation, the number of times the checksum is displayed, and the like may be arbitrarily changed according to the memory inspection settings for the ROM 90121, the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the like. Good. As an example, in the memory inspection setting table shown in FIG. 61 (B), the checksum calculation corresponding to the calculation start address MA00 and the calculation end address MA10 set when the number of impressions is "2" is not executed. By setting it, the calculation result may be displayed for a smaller number of checksums. Alternatively, the calculation result may be displayed for more checksums by adding the setting of the calculation start address and the calculation end address corresponding to the number of display times of "6" or more.

The memory inspection process shown in FIG. 61A is executed in step S9055 when it is determined in step S9054 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58 that there is no connection with the main board 9011. Further, when it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 61A that the relay non-connection flag is on, the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected. Therefore, when both the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the update display can be performed in step S90206, and the program or data is determined based on the checksum calculation result. The result can be displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9054 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58 that there is a connection with the main board 9011, the memory inspection process of step S9055 is not executed. Further, even when the memory inspection process is executed in step S9055, if it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 61 (A) that the relay unconnected flag is off, the update display in step S90206 is performed. I can't. As a result, if either one of the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the program or data determination result based on the checksum calculation result is not displayed. To control.

Instead of the update display of the calculation content in step S90206, or together with the update display of the calculation content, arbitrary notification based on the checksum calculation result may be performed. For example, instead of the image display on the screen of the main image display device 905MA, or together with this image display, the image display on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU, the audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, the top frame LED909a and the left frame. By lighting the notification lamp provided separately from the LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c or the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c, the notification operation using other production devices, a combination of some or all of them, etc. Notification that can specify the determination result of the determination process for determining whether or not the effect data stored in the ROM 90121 or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C may be executed may be executed. Further, the signal output from the specific terminal provided on the effect control board 9012 may be set to a different output state depending on the checksum calculation result or the like. As described above, the determination result of whether or not the effect data is normal may be any one that can be notified by controlling an arbitrary output.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process executed in step S9065 of FIG. 58. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 63, the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 determines whether or not it is the BGM change timing (step S90151). For example, the CPU 90130 may determine that it is the BGM change timing when a predetermined BGM change condition is satisfied based on an effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the like. As an example, the BGM change condition may be set so as to be satisfied when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is changed to any of a normal state, a probability change state, and a time saving state.

When it is determined in step S90151 that it is the BGM change timing (step S90151; Yes), the start address and end address of the audio data corresponding to the music to be played as BGM are specified (step S90152). For example, the predetermined area of the ROM 90121 includes data that can identify the start address and the end address of the ROM 90121 or the effect data memory 90123A for the audio data corresponding to the music to be played as BGM for each gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The BGM setting table may be stored in advance. The CPU 90130 may specify the start address and the end address of the audio data by referring to the BGM setting table according to the game state specified based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011.

Following the process of step S90152, the loop playback start control for starting the loop playback for repeatedly playing the music to be BGM is performed (step S90153). For example, the CPU 90130 notifies the voice processing circuit 90143 of a command indicating a loop reproduction instruction together with the start address and the end address of the voice data specified in step S90152. The voice processing circuit 90143 may be able to access the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A and read the voice data from the section between the start address and the end address indicated by the command from the CPU 90130. Then, according to the designation of performing loop reproduction, the music corresponding to the audio data may be sequentially reproduced from the beginning, and when the end of the music is reproduced, it may return to the beginning and repeat the reproduction of the music.

By the loop reproduction start control in step S90153, for example, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the normal state, the music as the normal BGM can be repeatedly reproduced. Further, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the probabilistic state, the music as the probabilistic BGM can be repeatedly played. When the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the time saving state, the music as the BGM during the time saving can be repeatedly played.

When it is determined in step S90151 that it is not the BGM change timing (step S90151; No), or after the loop reproduction start control in step S90153 is executed, the process corresponding to the value of the effect process flag is executed. At this time, the CPU 90130 determines the value of the effect process flag stored in the predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122, and performs processing according to the determination value from a plurality of processes described in advance in the effect control program. Select and execute. The process executed according to the determination value of the effect process flag includes the processes of steps S90170 to S90176.

The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process is a variable display of a decorative pattern on the screen of the main image display device 905MA based on whether or not a first fluctuation start command or a second fluctuation start command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received. Includes processing to determine whether or not to start. The first variation start command is an effect control command for notifying that the special figure game using the first special figure is started by the first special symbol display device 904A. The second variation start command is an effect control command for notifying that the special figure game using the second special figure is started by the second special symbol display device 904B. When either the first fluctuation start command or the second fluctuation start command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process is performed on the screen of the main image display device 905MA in response to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. In order to perform variable display of the decorative symbol above and other various production operations, it includes processing to determine a fixed decorative symbol and various production control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the type of display result. There is. When the variable display start setting process is executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the CPU 90130 controls various controls from the effect control pattern according to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the work memory 90131 or RAM 90122. It includes processing for reading data and performing various effect controls during variable display of decorative symbols. In addition, in the variable display effect processing, the final stop symbol as the final stop symbol, which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol, is completely stopped and displayed in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011. (Derived display) processing is included. In addition, in response to the fact that the end code is read from the predetermined effect control pattern, the final decoration symbol may be displayed as a complete stop display (derivative display). In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command elapses, the effect control board 9012 autonomously operates without using the effect control command from the main board 9011. The variable display result can be confirmed by deriving and displaying the fixed decorative symbol. After performing such effect control and the like, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

The variable display stop process in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the variable display stop processing, the jackpot game state starts based on the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command and the judgment result of whether or not the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received. It includes a process of determining whether or not to be performed. Then, when the variable display result corresponds to "big hit" and the big hit game state is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", while the variable display result corresponds to "miss". If the jackpot game state is not started, the effect process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to "0".

The jackpot display process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. This jackpot display process includes a process for executing a jackpot notification effect (fanfare effect) for notifying the start of a jackpot game state based on the reception of a jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 9011. There is. Then, when the execution of the jackpot notification effect is completed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5".

The jackpot effect process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this big hit medium effect process, the CPU 90130 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit medium effect executed in the big hit game state, and displays the effect image based on the set content as the main image display device. Sound and effects from speakers 908L and 908R by displaying on the screen of 905MA or sub-image display device 905SU, executing display effect by light emitter units 9071 to 9074, and outputting sound effect signal to sound output board 9013. Output sound, turn on, turn off or blink the top frame LED 909a, left frame LED 909b, right frame LED 909c, and decorative LED by outputting the illumination signal to the light emitter control boards 9016D to 9016F, and execute other effect control. Then, it becomes possible to execute the big hit medium effect corresponding to the big hit game state. In the jackpot middle effect processing, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "6" in response to receiving, for example, the jackpot end designation command transmitted from the main board 9011.

The jackpot end effect process in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this jackpot end effect processing, the CPU 90130 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the jackpot end effect (ending effect) executed when the jackpot game state ends, and the effect image based on the set content. By controlling the display of, the output of the fruit sound, the lighting, extinguishing, or blinking of various light emitting members, and other effect operations, it is possible to execute the jackpot end effect corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. After that, the effect process flag is cleared and the value is initialized to "0".

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S90171 of FIG. 63. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 64, the CPU 90130 first determines the final stop symbol or the like to be the final decorative symbol as the variable display result of the decorative symbol (step S90401). As the process of step S90401, the CPU 90130 finally determines the variable display content such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. Determine the stop symbol. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". is there.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not change to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "loss". ". When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, the final decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "loss". .. When the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)", the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the time saving state. When the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the probable change state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the CPU 90130 determines the different (mismatched) decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R as the final stop symbol. .. The CPU 90130 is updated by a random number circuit built in (or externally) in the effect control microcomputer 90120, a work memory 90131, a effect random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 (effect control counter setting unit, etc.), or the like. By extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the left confirmed symbol from the random numbers for production and referring to the left confirmed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121, the “left” of the confirmed decorative symbols The left confirmed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5L is determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right-determined symbol is extracted from the random numbers for effect, and the right-determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121 is referred to to obtain the confirmed decorative symbol. Among them, the right fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5R of the "right" is determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right fixed decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-confirmed symbol is extracted from the random numbers for production, and the fixed decorative symbol is determined by referring to the medium-determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121. Among them, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "medium" is determined.

When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", the CPU 131 determines the same (matching) decorative symbol as the final stop symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R. .. The CPU 90130 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left / right confirmed symbol from the random numbers for the effect, and refers to the left / right confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 to obtain the final decorative symbol. Among them, the decorative symbols having the same stop display symbol numbers are determined in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right". Further, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol from the random numbers for production and referring to the medium-determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121, among the confirmed decorative symbols. The medium-fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C is determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value is used. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", the CPU 90130 is the same in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. The (matching) decorative symbol of is determined as the final stop symbol. The CPU 90130 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a big hit confirmation symbol from the random numbers for production. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121, the stop display is aligned with the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the "left", "middle", and "right". Determine the decorative symbols with the same symbol number. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", and whether or not the promotion effect during big hit is executed, a normal symbol (for example, an even number) is displayed. It suffices to determine which of the indicated decorative symbol) and the probabilistic pattern (for example, the decorative symbol indicating an odd number) is to be the final decorative symbol. In the jackpot medium promotion effect, the combination of decorative symbols (non-probability variation jackpot combination) that reminds us of the jackpot but does not recall the probability variation state is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the probability variation state during the jackpot game state or at the end of the jackpot gaming state. It is a production that informs whether or not it becomes.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)", a fixed decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. In addition, when it is determined that the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)" and the promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, the definite decoration symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of probabilistic symbols. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the promotion effect during the big hit even if the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the fixed decorative symbol is decided from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. As a result, even though the probabilistic symbols are aligned and displayed as the final decorative symbols, it is possible to prevent the promotion effect during the jackpot from being executed so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

In the process of step S90401, when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", it is determined whether or not to execute the probabilistic promotion effect such as the re-lottery effect or the big hit medium promotion effect. You may. In the re-lottery effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable jackpot combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult or unrecognizable to be controlled to the probabilistic state. It is possible to notify that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state by displaying (re-variating) the decorative symbol again and stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of the probabilistic jackpot combination consisting of the same probabilistic symbol. In some cases, the decorative symbol of the non-probable change jackpot combination is stopped and displayed after the decorative symbol is re-variated by the re-lottery effect, so that it is not notified that the decorative symbol is controlled to the probabilistic state. When it is determined in the process of step S90401 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed may be determined before the re-lottery effect is executed.

Following the determination of the final stop symbol and the like in step S90401, the advance notice effect is determined (step S90402). In step S90402, the presence or absence of the advance notice effect, the effect mode when the advance notice effect is executed, and the like may be determined by using the advance notice effect determination table prepared, for example, by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 90121 in advance. In the notice effect determination table, for example, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value for determining the advance effect may be assigned to the presence / absence of the advance effect and the determination result of the effect mode according to the variable display content. .. The CPU 90130 may determine the presence / absence of the advance notice effect and the effect mode by referring to the advance notice effect determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the advance notice effect determination among the random number for the effect.

Following the determination of the advance notice effect in step S90402, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S90403). For example, the CPU 90130 selects one of a plurality of prepared special figure fluctuation effect control patterns in response to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, and sets it as a usage pattern. Further, the CPU 90130 selects one of a plurality of prepared advance notice effect control patterns and sets them as a use pattern in accordance with the determination result of the advance notice effect by the process of step S90402.

After determining the effect control pattern in step S90403, the CPU 90130 is provided in a predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the work memory 90131 or RAM 90122, for example, in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The initial value of the effect control process timer is set (step S90404). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative pattern and the like in the main image display device 905MA is made (step S90405). At this time, for example, a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the pattern to be used in step S90404 is transmitted to the VDP 90140 to be provided on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. The variation of the decorative symbol may be started in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R.

Following the process of step S90405, a setting for updating the hold storage display in the start winning prize storage display area 905H is made in response to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (step S90406). For example, in the start winning prize storage display area 905H, the display portion corresponding to the hold number "1" may be deleted, and the entire display portion may be moved to the left one by one. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S90407), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 65 (A) shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 65 (A), the effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, illuminant control data, movable member control data, operation detection control data, end code, and the like. It is composed of process data including. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the effect control process timer value which is a stored value of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the work memory 90131 or RAM 90122. ), And the determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In addition, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 9011, or a predetermined process is performed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120. Data indicating the switching timing of the effect control or the like may be set corresponding to a predetermined control content or processing content such as that the command has been executed. The pattern data constituting such an effect control pattern may be stored in the ROM 90121 in advance as management data.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the display screen of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol. It has been. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU. Even if the display data of the effect image on the display screen of the sub-image display device 905SU is added with the display data used for creating the lighting data for controlling the lighting mode by the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. Good. In this case, if the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the sub-image display device 905SU is specified by the display control data, the lighting mode by the plurality of light emitters arranged so as to form the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. Can also be specified. The display control data is not limited to specifying the lighting mode in the plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, and the lighting mode in the plurality of light emitters can be determined by using the control data separate from the display control data. It may be specified.

The voice control data includes data showing the voice output mode from the speakers 908L and 908R, such as data showing the output mode of the sound effect linked to the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol. There is. That is, the voice control data is data that specifies the voice output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R. For example, the voice control data may indicate various settings in the ROM 90121 or the effect data memory 90123A, such as whether or not to perform loop playback, in addition to the start address and end address of the voice data corresponding to the music or the like. ..

The light emitting body control data includes data indicating a lighting operation mode in various light emitting bodies such as a plurality of light emitting bodies constituting the light emitting body units 9071 to 9074, a top frame LED 909a, a left frame LED 909b, a right frame LED 909c, and a decorative LED. include. That is, the light emitting body control data is data that specifies the lighting operation of various light emitting members. The movable member control data includes data indicating an operation mode of the movable members 9051 to 9054, such as data indicating a drive mode of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C for rotating or moving the movable members 9051 to 9054. ing. That is, the movable member control data is data that specifies the rotation operation and the movement operation of the movable members 9051 to 9054. The operation detection control data includes, for example, an operation valid period for effectively detecting an instruction operation (tilting operation) for the operation rod of the stick controller 9031A and an instruction operation (push / pull operation) for the trigger button, or an instruction operation for the push button 9031B (push button 9031B). Data indicating the effect operation mode according to the player's operation action, such as the operation validity period for effectively detecting the pressing operation) and the data for specifying the control content of the effect operation when each operation is effectively detected, include.

It should be noted that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, and the effect control pattern is configured to include a part of the control data according to the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plurality of types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting each process data may be different depending on the content of the effect operation executed at each timing. That is, some process data includes all of display control data, voice control data, illuminant control data, movable member control data, and operation detection control data, and some process data includes some of these. There may be. Further, various other control data such as the effect model control data indicating the operation mode of the movable member included in the effect model may be included.

FIG. 65B shows various effect operations executed according to the contents of the effect control pattern. The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 determines the control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative symbol is displayed in the manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character is displayed. Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU. Further, control may be performed in which a plurality of light emitters arranged in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are turned on in a manner specified by the display control data to execute the display effect. Further, while controlling the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R in the mode specified by the voice control data, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 in the mode specified by the light emitter control data, Controls to blink various light emitting members such as the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, and the right frame LED 909c, and the trigger button, the operation rod, or the push button 9031B of the stick controller 9031A is controlled during the operation validity period specified by the operation detection control data. Controls to accept operations and determine the content of the effect. Dummy data (data for which control is not specified) may be set in the data corresponding to the effect component that is not the control target even if it corresponds to the effect control process timer determination value.

The CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 sets the effect control pattern based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, for example, when starting the variable display of the decorative pattern. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 90121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122, or the corresponding effect control may be set. The storage address of the pattern data constituting the pattern in the ROM 90121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the work memory 90131 or the RAM 90122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 90121 may be specified. After that, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, and if it matches, the effect operation corresponding to the corresponding various control data is performed. To control. In this way, the CPU 90130 has the effect device (main image display device 905MA, sub image display device 905SU, illuminant unit 9071) according to the contents of the process data # 1 to process data # n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. ~ 9074, speakers 908L, 908R, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter units 9071 to 9074, various light emitting members including a top frame LED909a, a left frame LED909b, and a right frame LED909c, movable members 9051 to 9054, decorative members 9057, and the like. ) To advance control. In each process data # 1 to process data # n, display control data # 1 to display control data # n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to # n. The data # n, the illuminant control data # 1 to the illuminant control data # n, the movable member control data # 1 to the movable member control data # n, and the operation detection control data # 1 to the operation detection control data # n are in the effect device. The effect control execution data # 1 to the effect control execution data # n that indicate the control content of the effect operation and specify the execution of the effect control are configured.

A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the CPU 90130 of the effect control microcomputer 90120 to the VDP 90140, the audio processing circuit 90143, the general-purpose output controller 90145, and the like. Upon receiving the command from the CPU 90130, the VDP 90140 reads the image data (image element data) indicated by the command from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B and temporarily stores them in the work area of the VRAM 90141. Further, the VDP 90140 selects image data corresponding to the display screens of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU from the image data stored in the work area of the VRAM 90141, and converts the selected image data into pixel data. It is arranged at a predetermined position in the image drawing area of the VRAM 90141 (a position indicated by information indicating a display position in a display area such as the main image display device 905MA). As a result, display data for one screen is created in the image drawing area of the VRAM 90141. At this time, the display data used for creating the lighting data of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 may be added to the display data of the effect image on the display screen of the sub image display device 905SU. In addition, the voice processing circuit 90143 that receives a command from the CPU 90130 acquires the voice data indicated by the command and temporarily stores it in a voice RAM or the like to develop the voice data.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect processing executed in step S90172 of FIG. 63. In the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 66, the CPU 90130 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, the effect control process timer value (step S90451). As an example, in step S90451, the effect control process timer value is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted), and when the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, the variable display is performed. It may be determined that the time has passed.

If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S90451 (step S90451; No), it is determined whether or not it is the super reach effect start timing (step S90452). The super reach effect start timing is a timing for starting the execution of the reach effect in the super reach, and may be predetermined in, for example, in the effect control pattern determined in the process of step S9043 shown in FIG. 64. When it is the start timing of the super reach effect (step S90452; Yes), the BGM off setting is performed (step S90453). For example, the CPU 90130 causes the volume of the audio channel for reproducing the BGM to be set to off by a command to the audio processing circuit 90143. In the voice processing circuit 90143, for example, the volume of the BGM may be changed to turn off the output. In the period when the BGM is off, only the volume of the BGM is set to off, and the music corresponding to the BGM may be continuously played. Alternatively, during the period when the BGM is off, the playback of the music corresponding to the BGM may be suspended. After the BGM off setting is performed in step S90453, the music on setting for super reach production is performed (step S90454). For example, the CPU 90130 notifies the start address and the end address of the voice data corresponding to the music for the super reach effect by the command to the voice processing circuit 90143. The voice processing circuit 90143 acquires the voice data corresponding to the music for super reach production based on the start address and the end address of the voice data notified by the command from the CPU 90130. Then, the volume of the audio channel for reproducing the music for super reach production may be set to on, and the music or the like corresponding to the audio data may be sequentially reproduced from the beginning.

If it is not the super reach effect start timing in step S90452 (step S90452; No), or after the music on setting is performed in step S90454, it is determined whether or not it is the super reach effect end timing (step S90455). The super reach effect end timing is a timing for ending the execution of the reach effect in the super reach, and may be predetermined in, for example, in the effect control pattern determined in the process of step S90403 shown in FIG. When it is the end timing of the super reach effect (step S90455; Yes), the music off setting for the super reach effect is set (step S90456). For example, the CPU 90130 causes the audio processing circuit 90143 to set the volume of the audio channel for reproducing the music for super reach effect to off. In the audio processing circuit 90143, for example, the volume of the music for super reach production may be set to off, and the reproduction of the music or the like may be terminated. After setting the music off for super reach production in step S90456, the BGM on setting is performed (step S90457). For example, the CPU 90130 causes the audio processing circuit 90143 to set the volume of the audio channel for reproducing the BGM to on. In the voice processing circuit 90143, for example, the volume of the BGM may be changed to turn on the output.

When it is not the end timing of the super reach effect in step S90455 (step S90455; No), or after the BGM on setting is performed in step S90457, for example, based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, after performing other effect operation control including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol (step S90458), the effect process during the variable display is terminated.

When the variable display time has elapsed in step S90451 (step S90451; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received (step S90459). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S90459; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and the device waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so.

When the symbol confirmation command is received in step S90459 (step S90459; Yes), the final stop that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol, for example, transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP90140. Control is performed to derive and display a symbol (fixed decorative symbol) (step S90460). Further, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (step S90461). Then, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the variable display stop process (step S90462), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 66, the music off setting for super reach effect is set in step S90456, and then the BGM on setting is immediately performed in step S90457. On the other hand, the BGM on setting may be performed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the music off setting is performed in step S90456. For example, the BGM on setting may be performed after the control for deriving and displaying the final stop symbol is performed in step S90460. Alternatively, the BGM on setting may be performed when the variable display start waiting process of step S90170 shown in FIG. 63 is executed. In particular, when the variable display result is "big hit", following the music off setting for super reach production, the music for fanfare production that notifies that the variable display result is "big hit" is played. After that, in response to the game state becoming the big hit game state, the music for the big hit middle production may be played. In addition, the music for super reach production may be a music for production during a big hit as it is and may be continuously played. When the variable display result becomes "big hit" in this way, the BGM on setting is performed in response to the execution of the variable display start waiting process in step S90170 shown in FIG. 63 after the big hit game state is completed. Good. As a result, when the variable display result becomes a "big hit", the reproduction of the music that becomes the BGM can be smoothly started.

In the variable display in-process effect shown in FIG. 66, the effect control pattern determined in the process of step S90403 shown in FIG. 64 (for example, the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, the advance notice effect control pattern, etc.) is based on the effect control process timer value. Using the process data acquired in the above, control for executing the effect operation by various effect devices is performed. Also in the big hit middle effect process in step S90175 and the big hit end effect process in step S90176 shown in FIG. 63, the CPU 90130 reads the effect control pattern from the ROM 90121 and the like, and uses the process data acquired based on the effect control process timer value. Controls for executing the effect operation by various effect devices may be performed.

In order to perform such effect control, the CPU 90130 determines whether or not the effect control process timer has timed out, and when the time-out occurs, the CPU 90130 switches the effect control execution data in the process data. That is, in the process data # 1 to process data # n as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the display control of the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU is performed based on the display control data set next. , Lighting control of a plurality of light emitters arranged in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 may be performed. Further, in the process data # 1 to the process data # n, the voice output control of the speakers 908L and 908R is performed based on the voice control data set next. Further, in the process data # 1 to process data # n, a plurality of light emitters constituting the light emitter unit 9071 to 9074 based on the light emitter control data set next, the top frame LED909a, the left frame LED909b, and the right Lighting control of the frame LED 909c and the decorative LED is performed. In the process data # 1 to process data # n, the drive control of the operation motors 9060A to 9060C is performed based on the movable member control data set next. In addition, in the process data # 1 to the process data # n, the detection control of the instruction operation by the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B is performed based on the operation detection control data set next.

In the effect control microcomputer 90120, the VDP 90140 reads various image data such as character image data necessary for displaying the effect image from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B based on the display control command from the CPU 90130, and reads a predetermined area of the VRAM 90141. Place in. When displaying the effect image, the same character image may be displayed repeatedly. When the image data stored in the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B is compressed, it takes time to decompress the image data after reading the image data. Therefore, at the stage of starting the display of the effect image, by arranging the necessary character image data or the like in the storage area of the VRAM 90141, it is compared with reading from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B corresponding to each frame. , The time required for drawing can be shortened.

After the display of the effect image is started, the CPU 90130 sets an attribute in the attribute register of the VDP 90140 every time a V blank occurs, and then instructs the reading execution of the attribute. In response, the VDP90140 reads the attributes. When this reading is completed, the reading end interrupt signal is output from the VDP 90140 to the CPU 90130. Upon receiving the read end interrupt signal, the CPU 90130 instructs the execution of the drawing process. In this way, the VDP 90140 executes the drawing process by writing the display data to the VRAM 90141 according to the read attribute.

A mainframe buffer and a subframe buffer are allocated to each of the plurality of storage areas to which the image display area and the image drawing area are allocated in the VRAM 90141. The mainframe buffer stores display data for displaying an image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. For example, the main frame buffer is allocated a memory area capable of storing pixel data of 800 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 600 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction). In the subframe buffer, display data for displaying an image on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU is stored, and display data used for creating lighting data for lighting control of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is stored. May be done. For example, the subframe buffer is allocated a memory area capable of storing pixel data of 480 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 885 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction).

The image data used to create the lighting data for controlling the lighting of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 corresponds to, for example, an image size of 320 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 320 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction). There is. The VDP90140 reduces the image data for creating lighting data to an image size of 80 dots in the horizontal direction (X-axis direction) and 80 dots in the vertical direction (Y-axis direction). The reduced image size corresponds to the resolution of the illuminant units 9071 to 9074 in which a plurality of illuminants are arranged in an aligned manner. As described above, the image data for creating the lighting data has a resolution higher than the resolution of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. As an example, anti-aliasing processing such as supersampling is performed. As another example, by acquiring the RGB values corresponding to the upper left dots for each rectangular range of 4 dots x 4 dots in the vertical and horizontal directions in the image data and using them as display data, the vertical and horizontal directions are each 1/4. Display data reduced to may be created. In this way, the display data to be converted into the lighting data is created by using the image data having a resolution higher than the resolution of the display by the plurality of light emitters. Thereby, for example, jaggies generated in the contour of a character image or the like can be suppressed, and the smoothness of display in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 can be improved. In particular, when an effect image such as a character image is moved and displayed, the contour portion can be smoothly displayed, and the interest of the display effect in the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 can be improved. The reduction of the image size may be performed in the image data deformation processing or the display data drawing processing by the VDP 90140, or may be performed by using a predetermined scaler circuit. The scaler circuit may reduce the image size at a predetermined reduction rate (for example, 1/4) by converting the number of pixels of the display data read from the VRAM 90141. In this way, the size change of the display data may be realized by a hardware circuit or by executing a predetermined program as software.

The image data read by the VDP 90140 may be used for creating lighting data by being written in a predetermined area (light emitter lighting data area) in the subframe buffer. On the other hand, the image data read by the VDP 90140 is written to the mainframe buffer and used for displaying an image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA. Further, the image data read by the VDP 90140 is written in an area other than the light emitter lighting data area in the subframe buffer, and is used for image display on the screen of the sub image display device 905SU. As described above, even if the same image data is used, it is sufficient that the usage can be different depending on the writing position in the VRAM 90141. In this way, the image data read from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B and temporarily stored in the VRAM 90141 is for displaying an image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, or the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. It suffices if it can also be used for creating lighting data for controlling lighting. Therefore, the image data stored in the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B is at least one of the effect image display control in the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU and the lighting control of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074. It can be used for either control.

As for the display data stored in the subframe buffer, for example, one frame is output in 1/60 second (about 16.7 milliseconds). As a result, the sub-image display device 905SU can update the displayed image at a frame period of 1/60 second. When the data for controlling the illuminant is also added to the data for displaying the sub-image, it can be output at a cycle of 1/60 second. In the light emitting body control board 9016C, the display data transmitted from the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A is temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151. Therefore, the buffer memory 90151 may store the data for controlling the illuminant at a cycle of 1/60 second in which the VDP 90140 outputs the display data for one frame.

In the light emitter control board 9016C, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 has a shorter cycle than the frame cycle (1/60 second, etc.) of an image display device using an LCD (liquid crystal display) such as the sub image display device 905SU. Lighting data for controlling lighting of a plurality of light emitters may be generated. As a specific example, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data for controlling lighting of the illuminant at a cycle of 1/120 second (about 8.3 milliseconds). In this way, the lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data of the light emitter in a cycle (1/120 seconds) shorter than the output cycle (1/60 seconds) of the display data by the VDP 90140, and the serial output circuit 90153 generates lighting data. The control signal based on the lighting data is output. In this case, the buffer memory 90151 can store the data for light emission control included in the display data corresponding to the image display for one frame output from the VDP 90140, that is, the data for controlling the light emitter of 80 dots × 80 dots. It suffices to have a storage data capacity. Further, by lighting the light emitters in a relatively short cycle, flicker (flicker) in the display effect executed by the plurality of light emitters arranged in each of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 is suppressed and the display is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. The lighting control of the light emitter is not limited to the one performed in a cycle of 1/2 of the output cycle of the display data, and the output cycle of the display data is, for example, a shorter cycle (for example, a cycle of 1/3). It may be performed at an arbitrary cycle shorter than that.

The serial output circuit 90153 lights up generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 at a cycle longer than the time required for the light emission control data included in the display data corresponding to the image display for one frame to be written to the buffer memory 90151. It may be set to output the control signal corresponding to the data. In this way, the data for light emission control corresponding to one frame is temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 in a time shorter than the cycle in which the control signal corresponding to the lighting data is output. As a result, even when the buffer memory 90151 having a storage data capacity capable of temporarily storing the data for light emission control corresponding to one frame is used, the lighting data can be stored in a time shorter than the output cycle of the control signal corresponding to the lighting data. The generation can be completed.

The buffer memory 90151 has a storage data capacity that can store data for light emission control included in the display data corresponding to the image display for a plurality of frames, such as the display data corresponding to the image display for two frames. You may be. In this case, a plurality of buffer areas are allocated to the storage area of the buffer memory 90151. Each buffer area may have a storage data capacity capable of storing data for light emission control included in the display data corresponding to the image display for one frame.

The lighting data generation circuit 90152 divides the data into a plurality of data ranges according to the storage position (read address, etc.) of the buffer memory 90151 that stores the data for light emission control. For example, the storage area of the buffer memory 90151 is divided into a plurality of buffer memory areas according to the storage address and the like. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 converts the lighting data of the illuminant included in any of the illuminant blocks B01 to B42 among the plurality of illuminant blocks B01 to B42 based on which buffer memory area the data stored in is read. Specify whether to convert.

The display data temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 is assigned to any of the light emitter blocks B01 to B42 for each of a plurality of divided data ranges. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 can specify the data range assigned to each illuminant block B01 to B42 by referring to the address identification table which is the conversion setting information prepared in advance. Based on this specific result, the address information of the illuminant driver provided corresponding to each illuminant block B01 to B42 can be specified. The address identification table may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM built in (or externally attached to) the lighting data generation circuit 90152. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data including address information, and outputs the lighting data to the light emitting body driving unit 90154 by the serial output circuit 90153.

Further, the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 includes gradation data indicating the gradation control amount of each light emitting element constituting each of the plurality of light emitting bodies. For example, the gradation data may indicate the output period (pulse width) of the pulse signal in PWM control as the gradation control amount. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 refers to a lighting data generation table that serves as color conversion setting information prepared in advance based on the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data read from the buffer memory 90151. By doing so, gradation data indicating the gradation control amount is generated. The lighting data generation table may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM built in (or externally attached to) the lighting data generation circuit 90152.

The lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 corresponds to a number of gradations smaller than the number of gradations of the image displayed based on the display data used for the conversion. For example, the display data transmitted from the effect control board 9012 via the effect control relay board 9016A and temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151 is for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). Gradation control is possible in 256 steps so that the brightness (gradation) becomes any level of "0" to "255". As described above, the number of gradations of the image displayed based on the display data transmitted from the effect control board 9012 is "256". The lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 has a brightness (gradation) of any one of "0" to "63" for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). Gradation control is possible in 64 steps so as to reach the level of. As described above, the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 shows the number of gradations of "64", which is less than "256".

The correspondence between the level (RGB value) of each display color shown in the display data and the gradation control amount of each light emitting element indicated by the gradation data included in the lighting data of the light emitting body is the light emission corresponding to each light emitting color. It may be determined in advance in consideration of the characteristics of the element (for example, luminous efficiency), white balance, and the like. As an example, a light emitting diode, which is a light emitting element constituting each light emitting body, has a non-linear characteristic in which the amount of current rapidly increases when the applied voltage reaches a predetermined value. Therefore, if the gradation control amount is converted into a gradation control amount proportional to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data, there is a possibility that inconvenience of display effect by a plurality of light emitters such as overexposure and underexposure may occur. is there. Therefore, the lighting data from the display data so that the light emitting element corresponding to each light emitting color constituting each of the plurality of light emitting bodies has a light emitting amount equivalent to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data. The setting information at the time of conversion to is may be stored in advance as a lighting data generation table.

FIG. 67 shows a configuration example of the lighting data generation table TC1 referred to by the lighting data generation circuit 90152. In the lighting data generation table TC1, the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the lighting data is set corresponding to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data. Here, for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) shown in the display data, the brightness (gradation) is at any level of "0" to "10". In that case, the table data may be configured so that the brightness (gradation) of each display color indicated by the lighting data is at the level of “0”. That is, when the brightness (gradation) shown in the display data of the light emitting element of each display color included in one light emitting body corresponding to one dot is "10" or less, the brightness of each display color By generating lighting data in which (gradation) is "0", a limit is set so as not to light the light emitter.

On the other hand, in the lighting data generation table TC1, at least one of the R (red), G (green), and B (blue) display colors indicated by the display data has a brightness (gradation) of "11" or more. The table data may be configured so that lighting data indicating an RGB value proportional to the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data is generated at the level of. For example, when the brightness (gradation) of B (blue) shown in the display data is "11", the brightness (gradation) of B (blue) shown in the lighting data is "2". If the brightness of R (red) or G (green) shown in the display data is "0" to "3", lighting data indicating that the brightness (gradation) is "0" is generated, and "4". If it is ~ "7", lighting data indicating that the brightness (gradation) is "1" is generated, and if it is "8" to "11", lighting data indicating that the brightness (gradation) is "2" is generated. As described above, the table data of the lighting data generation table TC1 is configured.

The image data read by the VDP 90140 from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B by the effect control microcomputer 90120 is used for displaying an image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 are lit. It may also be used for creating lighting data to be controlled. At this time, when the brightness (gradation) of each display color indicated by the display data created from the image data used for image display is less than a predetermined amount, the proportional relationship is the same as when the amount is equal to or more than a predetermined amount. When the lighting data is generated below, the influence of the non-linear characteristic of the light emitting diode becomes remarkable, and there is a possibility that an unnatural display effect is performed. Therefore, according to the brightness (gradation) of each display color indicated by the display data, when the amount of light emitted by the light emitting body is less than a predetermined amount, a limitation is provided on the lighting control so as not to light the light emitting body. In this way, the lighting control is different between the light emitting body having a light emitting amount of less than a predetermined amount and the light emitting body having a light emitting amount of a predetermined amount or more among the plurality of light emitting bodies. In particular, in this embodiment, while limiting the lighting control of the illuminant whose emission amount is less than a predetermined amount according to the RGB value of the display data is provided, the illuminant whose emission amount is a predetermined amount or more is set. Is controlled according to the RGB value of the lighting data, which is proportional to the RGB value of the display data. In this way, by making the lighting control different depending on whether or not the amount of light emitted is less than a predetermined amount, the influence of the non-linear characteristics of the light emitting element is reduced, and the player is not given a sense of discomfort in the display effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming less interesting.

A plurality of types of lighting data generation tables are prepared in advance, and any lighting data generation table may be selected as a table to be used based on a predetermined selection setting. In this case, a different lighting data generation table may be selected for each emission color of the light emitting element included in each light emitting body. For example, in the case of the light emitter blocks B01 to B06, the lighting data generation table TR01 is selected according to the emission color R (red), the lighting data generation table TG01 is selected according to the emission color G (green), and light emission is performed. The lighting data generation table TB01 is selected according to the color B (blue). On the other hand, in the case of the illuminant blocks B07, B08, and B15, the lighting data generation table TR02 is selected according to the emission color R (red), and the lighting data generation table corresponds to the emission color G (green). TG02 is selected, and the lighting data generation table TB02 is selected according to the emission color B (blue). Further, in the case of the illuminant blocks B09 to B14, the lighting data generation table TR03 is selected according to the emission color R (red), and the lighting data generation table TG03 is selected according to the emission color G (green). , The lighting data generation table TB03 is selected according to the emission color B (blue). In each lighting data generation table, the gradation control amount of each light emitting element indicated by the gradation data included in the lighting data of the illuminant, the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data created by VDP 141. It suffices if it is configured to include table data to be converted into. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 is designated by the lighting data by referring to the selected lighting data generation table based on the level (RGB value) of each display color shown in the display data read from the buffer memory 90151. Determine the gradation control amount.

The characteristics of the light emitting element may differ depending on the light emitting color. Therefore, the display data is converted into a gradation control amount whose correspondence with the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data is different according to the emission color of each light emitting element constituting the light emitting body. The setting information when converting from to lighting data may be stored in advance as a lighting data generation table.

It suffices if the display data can be converted into lighting data by using different lighting data generation tables according to the arrangement of each of the plurality of light emitters corresponding to each light emitting body block. Each of the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 emits light with the same gradation according to the arrangement of each of the plurality of light emitters depending on the size of the area where the plurality of light emitters are arranged and the front-rear relationship of each light emitter unit. Even if it is made to do so, it may give a different impression to the player. Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of each of the plurality of illuminants corresponding to each illuminant block, the lighting data is lit from the display data so that the luminescence amount corresponds to the same display color and gives an impression as close to uniform as possible. The setting information at the time of conversion to is stored in advance as a lighting data generation table.

In this way, each light emitter depends not only on the level (RGB value) of each display color indicated by the display data, but also on the light emission characteristics of each of the plurality of light emitting elements constituting the light emitter, the arrangement of the plurality of light emitters, and the like. Gradation data indicating the gradation control amount according to is generated. As a result, even when the light emitters including a plurality of types of light emitting elements having different light emitting colors are arranged in a predetermined region of the light emitting body units 9071 to 9074, the color reproducibility is enhanced and the effect of the production is enjoyed. To improve.

It should be noted that all the lighting data is not limited to those generated by referring to the lighting data generation table, and at least a part of the lighting data is generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 executing a predetermined data processing program. May be done. For example, for each display color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) shown in the display data, it is determined whether or not the amount of light emitted is less than the predetermined amount, and all the amounts of light emitted are less than the predetermined amount. In that case, a process of generating lighting data having a brightness (gradation) of "0" may be executed so as not to light the light emitting body.

As an example, in the lighting data generation process executed by the lighting data generation circuit 90152, display data for one dot is acquired, and it is determined whether or not all the RGB values indicated by the display data are "10" or less. .. Then, when all are "10" or less, all the RGB values in the lighting data are set to "0". On the other hand, when at least one of the RGB values shown in the display data is not "10" or less, the lighting data generation table corresponding to the light emitting body block and the light emitting color is selected. Subsequently, the lighting data corresponding to the display data is generated using the selected lighting data generation table. Then, it is determined whether or not the generation of the lighting data corresponding to all the dots is completed, and if the generation of the lighting data is not completed yet, the display data corresponding to the next 1 dot is acquired and the same processing is performed. It may be executed repeatedly. On the other hand, when the generation of the lighting data corresponding to all the dots is completed, the lighting data generation process may be terminated.

The lighting data generation process is not limited to the one that generates lighting data by referring to the lighting data generation table, and lighting data may be generated by executing a predetermined arithmetic processing program. For example, in the display data that enables gradation control in 256 steps for each display color, the brightness (gradation) of each display color is represented by 8 bits in the case of binary display. On the other hand, in the lighting data that enables gradation control in 64 steps for each display color, the brightness (gradation) of each display color is represented by 6 bits in the case of binary display. Therefore, when at least one of the RGB values shown in the display data is not "10" or less, numerical processing for truncating the lower 2 bits of the 8-bit data indicating the brightness (gradation) of each display color in the display data The lighting data may be generated by performing the above. Alternatively, lighting data corresponding to the display data may be generated according to a preset calculation formula. A plurality of types of arithmetic processing programs that can be used for conversion from display data to lighting data are prepared in advance, and the lighting data generation circuit 90152 is one of them according to the display color and arrangement (light emitter block, etc.) of the light emitting element. The display data may be converted into lighting data by selecting and executing the arithmetic processing program of.

The display data is not limited to the one that acquires the display data for each dot and sets and generates the lighting data. For example, the lighting data may be set and generated collectively by using predetermined mask data. In this case, dots having all RGB values of "10" or less are detected in the display data for one frame temporarily stored in the buffer memory 90151, and RGB in the lighting data corresponding to the detected dots is used. Mask data for setting all the values to "0" may be prepared in advance.

The RGB values shown in the display data for one dot are not limited to those set to be "0" when all the RGB values in the lighting data are "0" or less, and the RGB values for one dot are not limited to "0". When any of the RGB values shown in the display data is "10" or less, only the lighting data corresponding to the display color may be set to be "0". As an example, the brightness (gradation) of R (red) shown in the display data is "100", the brightness (gradation) of G (green) is "8", and the brightness (gradation) of B (blue) is When it is "2", the brightness (gradation) of R (red) indicated by the lighting data is "25", while the brightness (gradation) of G (green) and B (blue) is "2". The table data of the lighting data generation table may be configured so as to be "0", or the lighting data generation circuit 90152 may execute a predetermined arithmetic processing program. As described above, for each light emitting element of each display color in the light emitting body, a restriction may be provided so as not to perform lighting control of the light emitting body in which the amount of light emitted is less than a predetermined amount according to the RGB value of the display data. However, if there is a display color whose RGB value is "10" or less in the display data for one dot, and only that display color is set to "0" in the lighting data, the tint of the emission color May change. Therefore, when all the RGB values shown in the display data for one dot are "10" or less, it is desirable to set so that all the RGB values in the lighting data are "0".

Alternatively, the RGB values indicated by the display data for one dot may be added so that when the total value is less than a predetermined value, all the RGB values in the lighting data are set to "0". As an example, when the total value obtained by adding the brightness (gradation) of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) shown in the display data is "30" or less, it is shown in the lighting data. The table data of the lighting data generation table may be configured so that the brightness (gradation) of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) is all "0", or the lighting data generation circuit. The 90152 may execute a predetermined arithmetic processing program. In this case, even if the brightness (gradation) of R (red) shown in the display data is "11", the brightness (gradation) of G (green) and B (blue) is "0". If so, the brightness (gradation) of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) indicated by the lighting data is all "0". In this way, by setting a limit so as not to control the lighting of the light emitting body in which the total (total amount) of the light emitting amount by the plurality of light emitting elements constituting one light emitting body becomes less than a predetermined amount, the player It is possible to prevent the display effect from being uncomfortable and to prevent the effect from being lowered.

According to the RGB value of the display data, the amount of light emitted is not limited to a limit so as not to control the lighting of the light emitting body, and the influence of the non-linear characteristics of the light emitting element is taken into consideration. Therefore, arbitrary restrictions may be provided. As an example, if the brightness (gradation) of each display color shown in the display data is "0" to "8", lighting data indicating the brightness (gradation) is "0" is generated, and "9" or "9" or The table data of the lighting data generation table may be configured so that the lighting data indicating the brightness (gradation) of "1" is generated if it is "10", or the lighting data generation circuit 90152 performs a predetermined calculation. The processing program may be executed. In this way, when the brightness (gradation) of each display color indicated by the display data is less than a predetermined amount, the lighting control is restricted so that the lighting control is performed in a correspondence relationship different from the proportional relationship when the amount is more than the predetermined amount. May be provided. Further, the threshold value of whether or not the amount of light emitted by the light emitting body is less than a predetermined amount is not limited to the RGB value of "10" in the display data, and the influence of the non-linear characteristics of the light emitting element is taken into consideration. Any value may be set as long as it is set. Depending on the emission color (display color) of the light emitting element, the threshold value for whether or not the emission amount is less than a predetermined amount may be set to be different.

The image data stored in the effect data memory 90123A and 90123B is not limited to the one used for both display control and lighting control, and dedicated image data is prepared for creating lighting data, and the effect data memory is prepared in advance. It may be stored in 90123A and 90123B. In this case, the image data is preset so that the light emitting body whose lighting amount is less than a predetermined amount when the lighting data is generated in a proportional relationship with the display data is not lit without lighting control. You may do so. Lighting data may be created using the light emission data stored in the effect data memory 90123C. In this case as well, the light emission data may be set in advance so that the light emitting body whose light emission amount is less than a predetermined amount is not lit without lighting control.

The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data including gradation data to which the address information assigned to the light emitter driver on the upper side of the digit or the lower side of the digit is added, and the serial output circuit 90153 connects to the light emitting body driving unit 90154. Is output. Further, the lighting data generated by the lighting data generation circuit 90152 includes drive control data for dynamically lighting and controlling a plurality of light emitters for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42. The lighting data generation circuit 90152 generates lighting data including drive control data to which the address information assigned to the light emitting body driver on the strobe side is added, and outputs the lighting data to the light emitting body driving unit 90154 by the serial output circuit 90153.

The serial output circuit 90153 outputs a common clock signal to the plurality of serial output systems K01 to K21 as the serial clock SC shown in FIG. 45. The serial clock SC output from the serial output circuit 90153 is supplied to each of the plurality of light emitter drivers included in the light emitter drive unit 90154 via the serial signal wiring. Each illuminant driver receives the serial data SD transmitted in synchronization with the serial clock SC.

On the other hand, the serial output circuit 90153 may output a control signal including drive control data and gradation data as serial data SD at different timings according to each of the serial output systems K01 to K21. When control signals are output to each of the serial output systems K01 to K21 at the same timing, lighting control of a large number of illuminants at the same timing is performed by a large number of illuminant drivers included in the illuminant drive unit 90154. May be started. In this case, a large amount of drive current flows as an inrush current in a short period of time, which may cause radio interference due to noise radio waves or the like. In addition, the manufacturing cost may increase due to the need for a power supply circuit for generating a large amount of drive current. On the other hand, by outputting the control signal that becomes the serial data SD at different timings according to each of the plurality of serial output systems K01 to K21, the generation of inrush current is suppressed, and the generation of noise radio waves and manufacturing It is possible to prevent an increase in cost.

In the illuminant drive unit 90154, each illuminant driver confirms whether or not the illuminant driver address indicated by the address information included in the received serial data SD matches the illuminant driver address assigned to the illuminant driver address. To do. At this time, if they match, the serial data SD which becomes the drive control data and the gradation data is taken in, converted into parallel data, and the lighting control of the illuminant is performed based on this. For example, the illuminant driver on the strobe side drives and controls a plurality of illuminants connected to the strobe signal line by outputting a strobe signal based on the drive control data. Further, the illuminant driver on the upper side of the digit or the lower side of the digit outputs a digit signal based on the gradation data to control the gradation of a plurality of illuminants connected to the digit signal line. In this way, the dynamic lighting control of the plurality of light emitters is performed for each of the plurality of light emitter blocks B01 to B42, and the light emitter units 9071 to 9074 included in the movable members 9051 to 9054 constituting the effect movable mechanism 9050 are arranged. A display effect is performed according to the lighting mode of the plurality of arranged light emitters.

As an example of a specific display effect by the effect movable mechanism 9050, in the retracted state (first state) in which the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are separated and the display screen of the main image display device 905MA can be visually recognized. , A display effect using a plurality of light emitters arranged on the movable members 9051 to 9054 that can be visually recognized by the player is executed in conjunction with the display effect by the main image display device 905MA. In the retracted state, the movable members 9051 and 9052 are located above and the movable members 9053 and 9054 are located below. In this way, when the movable members 9051 to 9054 are not rotating and are in the retracted state (when stopped), only the light emitting body that can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901 among the plurality of light emitting bodies. Lighting control. As a result, power consumption can be reduced. As a display effect by controlling the lighting of the light emitter, for example, characters and symbols are displayed, and blinking and emission colors of a plurality of light emitters are moved in a predetermined order to be variable according to the variable display by the main image display device 905MA. A display effect or the like may be executed. Further, when the reach effect is executed, at least one of the movable members 9051 to 9054 may be moved (vibration, advancement, etc.), or characters or symbols such as "reach" may be displayed using a plurality of light emitters. Good.

On the other hand, when the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 are close to each other and the display screen of the main image display device 905MA is difficult to see or cannot be seen (second state), the movable members 9051 to 9054 are arranged. The display effect using all of the plurality of light emitters is executed in conjunction with the display effect by the main image display device 905MA or independently of the display effect by the main image display device 905MA. In the advanced state, the movable members 9051 and 9052 rotate as the decorative member 9057 in the upper mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 moves downward, and the movable members 9053 and 9054 of the lower mechanism are located above. .. In this way, when the movable members 9051 to 9054 are in the advanced state (when they are operating) in the rotating operation, all of the plurality of light emitters are controlled to light up.

The integrated display effect on the movable members 9051 to 9054 may be started before or during the change of the upper mechanism and the lower mechanism of the effect movable mechanism 9050 from the retracted state to the advanced state. In this way, when the movable members 9051 to 9054 are rotating, all the plurality of light emitters may be turned on to perform the display effect regardless of whether or not they are visible from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901. As a result, the effect of rotating the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be increased. Further, by lighting all the plurality of light emitters regardless of whether or not they can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the light emitters for which lighting control is not performed can be visually recognized by the player by simple control. Can be suppressed.

The ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C mounted on the effect control board 9012 as shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 are provided with a plurality of storage areas according to the storage contents. For example, the ROM 90121 has a program management area R01 as a first storage area for storing a program for effect control and various management data, and a voice data first storage area as a second storage area for storing voice data. R11 and the like are provided. The effect data memory 90123A is provided with an audio data second storage area R12 as a storage area for storing audio data and an image data first storage area R21 as a storage area for storing image data. The effect data memory 90123B is provided with an image data second storage area R22 as a storage area for storing image data. Audio data The audio data used for controlling the audio output by the speakers 908R and 908L is stored in the audio data first storage area R11 and the audio data second storage area R12. In the image data first storage area R21 and the image data second storage area R22, together with the image data used for controlling the display of the effect image in the main image display device 905MA and the sub image display device 905SU, the light emitter unit 9071 to Image data used for lighting control in a plurality of light emitters arranged in alignment with 9074 may be stored.

FIG. 68A shows a configuration example of audio data stored in the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. .. In the example shown in FIG. 68 (A), the start address and the end address in the voice data first storage area R11 and the voice data second storage area R12 in which the respective voice data are stored correspond to a plurality of songs. It is set. For example, the audio data corresponding to the music A-1 is used to reproduce the normal BGM in the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the normal state, and is stored in the section from the start address MA02 to the end address MA03. There is. The audio data corresponding to the music A-2 is used to reproduce the effect sound at the time of the super reach effect in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed, and is stored in the section from the start address MA03 + 1 to the end address MA05. .. The audio data corresponding to the music A-1 and the music A-2 may be stored in the audio data first storage area R11.

The audio data corresponding to the music B-1 of FIG. 68 (A) is used to reproduce the BGM in the probabilistic change state in which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the probable change state, and is from the start address MA19 + 1 to the end address MA21. It is stored in the section. Here, the start address MA09 + 1 of the music B-1 has an address value smaller than the address MA10 which is the final address of the ROM 90121, and is included in the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 which provides the first area. There is. On the other hand, the end address MA1a of the music B-1 has an address value larger than the address MA10 which is the final address of the ROM 90121, and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A providing the second area. Included in. As described above, the audio data corresponding to the music B-1 straddles both the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. It is remembered. The audio data corresponding to the music B-2 is used to reproduce the BGM in the time saving state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the time saving state, and is stored in the section from the start address MA1a + 1 to the end address MA1c. .. The audio data corresponding to the music X is used to reproduce the effect sound during the jackpot in which the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the jackpot gaming state, and is stored in the section from the start address MA1g + 1 to the end address MA11. .. The audio data corresponding to the music B-2 and the music X may be stored in the audio data second storage area R12.

The audio data corresponding to the music B-1 shown in FIG. 68 (A) includes both the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. It is remembered straddling. Even in this case, since the audio data first storage area R11 and the audio data second storage area R12 are provided in the portions of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memory 90123A to which continuous addresses are assigned, the music B-1 is reproduced. Occasionally, as in the case of playing other songs, the start address and end address of the audio data are specified, the read address is updated sequentially from the start address, and the audio data is read to correspond to the song B-1. The audio data to be used can be read appropriately.

68 (B1) to (B4) are timing diagrams showing an operation example of playing music on the pachinko gaming machine 901. Of these, FIG. 68 (B1) shows a period of “execution” in which the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol is being executed and “stop” in which the variable display is stopped. FIG. 68 (B2) shows the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901. FIG. 68 (B3) shows a music to be reproduced among a plurality of music that can be reproduced using the audio data as shown in FIG. 68 (A). FIG. 68 (B4) shows a storage area for reading audio data among the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. Shown.

Execution of the variable display shown in FIG. 68 (B1) is started before the timing T01 is reached. At this time, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 shown in FIG. 68 (B2) is the normal state. If the reach effect in the super reach is not executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol in the normal state, the start address MA02 is played so that the music A-1 as the normal BGM shown in FIG. 68 (A) is played in a loop. The audio data corresponding to the music A-1 is read from the section from the to the end address MA03. The section from the start address MA02 to the end address MA03 is included in the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121. Therefore, until the timing T01 is reached, the loop reproduction of the music A-1 to be reproduced is performed as shown in FIG. 68 (B3), and the audio data first storage area R11 is performed as shown in FIG. 68 (B4). Is the read target area for audio data.

After that, at the timing T01, the reach effect in the super reach is started. At this time, the process of step S90452 shown in FIG. 66 determines that it is the start timing of the super reach effect, so that the process of step S90453 sets the BGM off. Then, the music on setting for super reach production is performed by the process of step S90454. In this way, during the period in which the reach effect in the super reach is executed, from the section from the start address MA03 + 1 to the end address MA05 so that the music A-2 for the super reach effect shown in FIG. 68 (A) is played. , The audio data corresponding to the music A-2 is read out. The section from the start address MA03 + 1 to the end address MA05 is included in the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121. Therefore, from the start timing of the super reach effect at the timing T01 to the end timing of the super reach effect at the timing T02, the music A-2 is the target of reproduction as shown in FIG. 68 (B3). As shown in 68 (B4), the voice data first storage area R11 becomes the voice data read target area.

At the timing T02, it is determined that the super reach effect end timing is reached by the process of step S90455 shown in FIG. At this time, the process of step S90456 sets the music off for the super reach effect, and the process of step S90457 sets the BGM on. After that, at the timing T03, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 68 (B2), based on the variable display result being the “big hit”. In addition, when the variable display result becomes a "big hit", for example, a dedicated music for notifying that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" may be played in the period from timing T02 to timing T03. .. Even when the variable display result is "missing", a dedicated music corresponding to the execution of the reach effect in the super reach may be played. Alternatively, the music A-2 for super reach production may be continuously played until the timing T03 is reached. Alternatively, the playback of the music may be paused in order to clearly notify the variable display result.

When the jackpot game state is entered at the timing T03, the sound corresponding to the music X is played from the section from the start address MA1g + 1 to the end address MA11 so that the music X for the production during the jackpot shown in FIG. 68 (A) is played. The data is read. The section from the start address MA1g + 1 to the end address MA11 is included in the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. Therefore, from the time when the jackpot game state is reached at timing T03 to the end of the jackpot game state at timing T04, the music X is the target of playback as shown in FIG. 68 (B3), and is shown in FIG. 68 (B4). As shown, the voice data second storage area R12 is the voice data read target area.

At the timing T04, the jackpot gaming state ends, and the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the probability changing state. At this time, it is determined in step S90151 shown in FIG. 63 that the BGM change timing is reached. Then, by the processing of steps S90152 and S153, the music B-1 is played from the section from the start address MA09 + 1 to the end address MA1a so that the music B-1 as the probabilistic BGM shown in FIG. The voice data corresponding to is read out. The section from the start address MA09 + 1 to the end address MA1a is included in both the audio data first storage area R11 provided in the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 provided in the effect data memory 90123A. Therefore, when the music B-1 is loop-reproduced in the probabilistic state, the audio data read-out target area becomes the audio data first storage area R11 of the ROM 90121 and the audio data second storage area R12 of the effect data memory 90123A. There is a period. For example, in the period from timing T04 to timing T08, loop reproduction of the music B-1 to be reproduced is performed as shown in FIG. 68 (B3). In this period, in the period from timing T04 to timing T05 and the period from timing T06 to timing T07, the audio data first storage area R11 becomes the audio data read target area as shown in FIG. 68 (B4). .. On the other hand, in the period from timing T05 to timing T06 and the period from timing T07 to timing T08, the audio data second storage area R12 becomes the audio data read target area as shown in FIG. 68 (B4). Even in the period after the timing T08, if the music B-1 as the probabilistic change BGM is played in a loop in the period until the probability change state ends or the reach effect in the super reach is executed. Good.

As described above, when the music B-1 which becomes the BGM during the probabilistic change is reproduced in a loop in the probabilistic state, the audio data read target area is provided in the audio data first storage area R11 and the effect data memory 90123A provided in the ROM 90121. It switches to the voice data second storage area R12. The audio data second storage area R12 in the effect data memory 121 corresponds to a specific address range continuous from the final address of the audio data first storage area R11 in the ROM 90121. Therefore, if the start address MA09 + 1 and the end address MA1a of the music B-1 are specified, the CPU 90130 can read the audio data while updating (incrementing) the address in the same manner as when playing another music, and the music B- The audio data corresponding to 1 can be smoothly read from both the audio data first storage area R11 and the audio data second storage area R12, and the music B-1 can be reproduced.

In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58, by executing the effect data transfer process in the initial setting process of step S9056, at least a part of the effect data used for executing the effect by various effect devices. However, for example, the ROM 90121 may be transferred to the RAM 90122 or the work memory 90131, or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C may be transferred to the VRAM 90141 or the like. In this case, for example, the control of transferring the image data read from the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B to the VRAM 90141 is started, and in parallel with this transfer, the initial operation by the movable members 9051 to 9054 may be executed. .. In this way, by executing the initial operation of the movable member in parallel with the transfer of the predetermined effect data, the effect data can be efficiently transferred and the occurrence of delay can be suppressed.

Alternatively, the first effect data used for executing the effect by the display device, for example, the main image display device 905MA, is produced by the display device, such as the operation of the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the audio output by the speakers 908L and 908R. It may be transferred with priority over the second effect data used for executing the effect different from the above. In this case, in parallel with the transfer of the second effect data, the initial signal is supplied to the main image display device 905MA or the like using the first effect data already transferred. As a result, the effect data can be efficiently transferred, and the initial display by the display device such as the main image display device 905MA can be started within a short time after the power supply is started. Stable display can be suppressed.

In the effect data transfer process, the transfer of the initial operation data used for the initial operation of the movable member may be started, and then the transfer of the initial display data used for the initial display of the display device may be started. Further, in the effect data transfer process, the transfer of the normal operation data used for the normal operation of the movable member may be started, and then the transfer of the normal display data used for the normal display of the display device may be started. In this way, the effect data used for executing the effect by the second effect device, such as the movable members 9051 to 9054, is obtained from the effect data used for executing the effect by the first effect device, for example, the main image display device 905MA. Also give priority to transfer. As a result, the effect data can be efficiently transferred, and the initial operation by, for example, the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be started within a short time after the power supply is started, so that the occurrence of delay can be suppressed.

In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58, in the initial setting process of step S9056, control may be performed to execute the initial operation by the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057. As such an initial operation, the movable members 9051 to 9054 overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA from the retracted state as the second state that does not overlap the display screen (display area) of the main image display device 905MA. It may be changed to the advanced state as the first state. As a result, for example, by making the display area of the main image display device 905MA on which unstable display is performed difficult or invisible, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of delay while appropriately performing the initial operation.

Alternatively, as an initial operation based on the control in the initial setting process, an effect device such as the movable members 9051 to 9054 may be operated with an initial operation pattern obtained by mixing a plurality of operation patterns. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 can be operated in a plurality of operation patterns in the advance notice effect and the reach effect.

FIG. 69 shows a retracted state as an initial state of the upper mechanism 9050T including the movable members 9051 and 9052 and the decorative member 9057 among the effect movable mechanisms 9050, and a plurality of operation patterns by the upper mechanism 9050T. The movable members 9051 and 9052 included in the upper mechanism 9050T are pivotally supported by the decorative member 9057 and can rotate, and the movable member 9051 and the movable member 9052 have different rotation ranges. That is, the movable member 9052 can rotate between the retracted position and the advanced position with respect to the movable member 9051. The movable member 9051 has a configuration in which the base body is arranged behind the front surface portion provided with the plurality of light emitting bodies, and holds the movable member 9052 between the front surface portion and the base body.

As shown in FIG. 69 (A), when the upper mechanism 9050T is in the retracted state as the initial state, the movable member 9051 is located on the upper side in a state in which the longitudinal direction is substantially horizontal. In the operation pattern T1 shown in FIG. 69B, the movable member 9052 can be rotated by the driving force of the operation motor 9060B shown in FIG. 39 without moving the decorative member 9057 and the movable member 9051. In the operation pattern T2 shown in FIG. 69C, the moving force 9060A shown in FIG. 39 causes the movable members 9051 and 9052 to rotate in an overlapping state as the decorative member 9057 moves downward. it can. In the operation pattern T3 shown in FIG. 69 (D), the movable member 9051 is rotated by the driving force of the operating motor 9060A as the decorative member 9057 moves downward, and the movable member 9052 is rotated by the driving force of the operating motor 9060B. Can be rotated with respect to the movable member 9051 to advance the movable member 9052 below the movable member 9051.

FIG. 70 shows a retracted state as an initial state in the lower mechanism 9050B provided with movable members 9053 and 9054, and a plurality of operation patterns by the lower mechanism 9050B among the effect movable mechanisms 9050. The movable members 9053 and 9054 included in the lower mechanism 9050B are connected to the frame of the lower support unit via a predetermined link mechanism, and can be moved within a predetermined range by the power of the operation motor 9060C shown in FIG. 39. The link mechanism includes, for example, the link members 90642a and 90642b shown in FIG. 70B, the link members 90645a and 90645b, and the like. One end of the link members 90645a and 90645b is pivotally supported by the frame, and the other end is pivotally supported near the lower end of the movable member 9054 to guide the movement of the movable member 9054.

As shown in FIG. 70 (A), when the lower mechanism 9050B is in the retracted state as the initial state, each of the movable members 9053 and 9054 is located below, and the movable member 9053 is located behind the movable member 9054. As a result, the player can hardly see the movable member 9053. In the operation pattern B1 shown in FIG. 70 (B), the movable member 9053 moves upward from the back side of the movable member 9054 by the driving force of the operation motor 9050C with a slight rotation. In the operation pattern B2 shown in FIG. 70 (C), the movable member 9054 can be moved upward with the movement of the movable member 9053 by the further driving force of the operation motor 9050C.

The initial operation pattern makes it possible to execute an initial operation in which the upper mechanism 9050T is continuously operated in the operation patterns T1 to T3 and an initial operation in which the lower mechanism 9050B is continuously operated in the operation patterns B1 and B2. The initial operation for operating the upper mechanism 9050T and the initial operation for operating the lower mechanism 9050B may be set so that the initial operations are executed in order and the execution periods do not overlap with each other, or at least a part thereof. By overlapping the execution periods of, each initial operation may be set to be able to be executed in parallel. Even if each initial operation is executed in sequence, the initial operation executed before the initial operation time elapses is an initial operation pattern formed by mixing a plurality of operation patterns, and the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member. The 9057 will be operated. Further, when each initial operation is executed in parallel, the movable members 9051 to 9054 and decoration are used in the initial operation pattern formed by mixing a plurality of operation patterns during the period in which the initial operations are executed in parallel. The member 9057 is operated.

In this way, the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the decorative member 9057 are operated in the initial operation pattern formed by mixing a plurality of operation patterns. As a result, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started, the effect device can be operated in a plurality of operation patterns corresponding to the effect accompanying the execution of the game, and the operation can be confirmed appropriately.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is a part described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have the structure of.

As a specific example, in the above embodiment, when it is determined in step S9057 shown in FIG. 58 that the relay non-connection flag is on, the origin abnormality is not notified in step S9060. That is, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected, the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed, while the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected. In some cases, it is controlled so as not to notify the abnormality of the movable member. At the same time, when it is determined in step S9054 shown in FIG. 58 that there is no connection with the main board 9011 and it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 61 (A) that the relay unconnected flag is on, step S90206 It is controlled to display the checksum calculation contents etc. by the update display of. That is, when both the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the checksum calculation result and the like can be displayed, while the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9016A and the main board 9012 can be displayed. When either one of the boards 9011 and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, control is performed so that the checksum calculation result or the like is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the control of whether or not the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed and the control of whether or not the checksum calculation result and the like can be displayed. Anything that is configured to be feasible will do.

In the following, first, a modification relating to the abnormality notification of the movable member will be described. In the above embodiment, when it is determined in step S9057 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58 that the relay unconnected flag is on, the processes of steps S9058 and S9059 are not executed together with the process of step S9060. It was explained that the control is performed so that not only the abnormality notification of the movable member but also the confirmation of the origin position is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, even when the relay non-connection flag is turned on, both steps S9058 and S9059 or only step S9058 may be executed. That is, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected, the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 can be confirmed based on the position detection signal from the movable member position sensor 9061. While determining the presence or absence of the origin abnormality, control may be performed so as not to notify the abnormality of the movable member when the origin abnormality occurs.

Alternatively, even when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected, the abnormality notification of the movable member can be performed, while the notification mode of the abnormality notification is the effect control board 9012 and the effect control. The notification mode may be difficult to recognize as compared with the notification mode of the abnormality notification when the relay board 9016A is connected. For example, when an abnormality notification of a movable member is performed by displaying an image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, the display size of the image is reduced, the transparency of the image is increased, and the image is displayed. By shortening the period, reducing the number of times the image is displayed, or a combination of a part or all of them, it is sufficient that the notification mode is such that it is difficult to recognize the abnormality notification of the movable member. When the notification operation is performed using a plurality of effect devices, the notification mode may be such that it is difficult to recognize the abnormality notification of the movable member by reducing the number of the production devices used for the notification operation. In this way, the range of the connection state of whether or not the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected is defined, and the limit of the abnormality notification that the abnormality notification of the movable member is not executed is defined, or By setting the limit of the abnormality notification that the notification mode is difficult to recognize, the abnormality notification of the movable member may be limited according to the connection state.

In the above embodiment, in the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58, the initial operation of the movable member can be executed in the initial setting process of step S9056 even when the relay non-connection flag is on. On the other hand, when the relay non-connection flag is on, it may be controlled not to execute the initial operation of the movable member. That is, when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected, the initial operation of the movable member can be executed, while the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected. If this is the case, control may be performed so that the initial operation of the movable member is not performed.

In the above embodiment, the substrate that is directly connected to the effect control board 9012 via the harness HN1 (without via another board), such as the effect control relay board 9016A, is not connected to the effect control board 9012. It has been described as being controlled so as not to notify the abnormality of the movable member when it is in the connected state. On the other hand, a substrate indirectly connected to the effect control board 9012 via another board such as the effect control relay board 9016A, such as the drive control board 9016B, is not connected to the effect control board 9012. In some cases, it may be controlled so as not to notify the abnormality of the movable member.

In the above embodiment, the operating motors 9060A to 9060C for providing a driving force for moving the movable members 9051 to 9054 and the movable member position sensor 9061 for detecting the operating state of the movable members 9051 to 9054 are both provided. It has been described as being connected to the drive control board 9016B. On the other hand, the substrate to which the operation motors 9060A to 9060C are connected and the substrate to which the movable member position sensor 9061 is connected may be provided separately. For example, the operation motors 9060A to 9060C may be connected to the drive control board 9016B, while the movable member position sensor 9061 may be configured to be connected to a sensor board different from the drive control board 9016B. In this case, different controls may be performed on a plurality of boards that can be directly or indirectly connected to the effect control board 9012 according to their respective connection states. As an example, when the effect control board 9012 and the drive control board 9016A are directly or indirectly connected, but the effect control board 9012 and the sensor board are not connected, the initial operation of the movable member is performed. On the other hand, it may be controlled so as not to notify the abnormality of the movable member. Further, when the effect control board 9012 and the drive control board 9016A are not connected, while the effect control board 9012 and the sensor board are directly or indirectly connected, the initial operation of the movable member is performed. On the other hand, it may be controlled to notify the abnormality of the movable member.

In the above embodiment, as a configuration for detecting the state of the movable member such as the movable member 9051 to 9054, the position of the movable member 9051 to 9054 can be detected by using the movable member position sensor 9061. On the other hand, any state of the movable member may be detectable, and an abnormality notification of the movable member may be executed based on the detection result. For example, a sensor that can directly or indirectly detect the speed, acceleration, movement amount, rotation amount, operating time, shape, temperature, or a part or all of the movable members 9051 to 9054 at a predetermined position. Anything may be set as long as it can be set so that abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed based on the detection result. Further, in a drive mechanism that supplies a driving force for changing (moving) a movable member such as an operation motor 9060A to 9060C together with a state in a movable member such as movable members 9051 to 9054 or in place of a state in the movable member. It may be possible to detect an arbitrary state and execute abnormality notification based on the detection result. Instead of the operating motors 9060A to 9060C, the movable member may be changed (moved) by an arbitrary driving mechanism that supplies a driving force such as a solenoid. In this way, it may be possible to detect an arbitrary state in an arbitrary drive mechanism and execute abnormality notification based on the detection result.

In the above embodiment, the origin positions of the movable members 9051 to 9054 are confirmed in step S9058 of the effect control main process shown in FIG. 58, and when it is determined in step S9059 that there is an origin abnormality, step S9060 is performed. It was explained as a notification that an origin abnormality has occurred. Along with such an abnormality notification in the initial setting of the movable member, or instead of the abnormality notification in the initial setting of the movable member, for example, the state of the movable members 9051 to 9054 is detected by the effect control process process in step S9065 shown in FIG. Based on the result of the above, the abnormality notification of the movable member may be enabled. Regarding the abnormality notification during the normal operation of the movable member, the abnormality notification of the movable member can be executed when the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected, while the effect control board 9012 and the effect control. When the relay board 9016A is not connected to the relay board 9016A, it may be controlled so as not to notify the abnormality of the movable member.

In the above embodiment, it has been described that the movable member for the effect can be notified of the abnormality, such as the movable members 9051 to 9054. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an abnormality notification may be executed for any movable member that can move according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the wiring for driving the solenoid 9027 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 9028 for the grand prize opening door shown in FIG. 39 may be connected to the main board 9011 via the solenoid relay board. Further, detection by a sensor for detecting the operating state of the movable wing piece provided in the normal variable winning ball device 906B and a sensor for detecting the operating state of the large winning opening door provided in the special variable winning ball device 907. Wiring for transmitting signals may be connected to the main board 9011 via a solenoid relay board or a sensor relay board. In such a configuration, when the main board 9011 is connected to the solenoid relay board or the sensor relay board, it is possible to perform abnormality notification of the movable wing piece or the prize-winning door, while the main board 9011 and the solenoid relay board. Alternatively, when the sensor relay board is not connected, it may be controlled so as not to notify the abnormality of the movable wing piece or the grand prize opening door. Alternatively, when the payout control board and the launch control board are connected, the launch motor abnormality notification can be executed, while when the payout control board and the launch control board are not connected, the launch motor abnormality is enabled. It may be controlled so that the notification is not performed.

Further, the movable member is not limited to the one capable of executing abnormality notification, and any circuit, device or other element may be capable of executing abnormality notification. It is not limited to the abnormality notification, and may be capable of any output.

In the above embodiment, it has been described that the presence or absence of the abnormality notification is different depending on the connection state between a plurality of boards such as the connection state between the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence or absence of abnormality notification may be different depending on, for example, a connection state in an arbitrary circuit, device, or other element provided inside or outside a single substrate. That is, in a configuration in which a first connection portion and a second connection portion that can be connected to each other are provided, it is possible to execute an arbitrary abnormality notification when the first connection portion and the second connection portion are connected. , When the first connection part and the second connection part are not connected, it may be controlled so as not to perform an abnormality notification. Not limited to abnormality notification, in a configuration in which a first connection portion and a second connection portion that can be connected to each other are provided, arbitrary output is possible when the first connection portion and the second connection portion are connected. On the other hand, when the first connection portion and the second connection portion are not connected, control may be performed so as not to output. Further, the unconnected state between the boards and the unconnected state between the connecting portions may include a state in which at least some wirings are connected and some other wirings are not connected. ..

Next, a modified example for displaying the checksum calculation result or the like will be described. In the above embodiment, when it is determined in step S9054 shown in FIG. 58 that there is no connection with the main board 9011, the memory inspection process is executed in step S9055, and in step S90205 shown in FIG. 61 (A). When it is determined that the relay non-connection flag is off, the process of step S90206 is not executed, so that the checksum calculation result and the like are not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is determined in step S9054 shown in FIG. 58 that there is no connection with the main board 9011, if the relay unconnected flag is off, the memory inspection process in step S9055 is executed. It may not be done. That is, even if the effect control board 9012 and the main board 9011 are not connected, if the effect control board 9012 and the effect control relay board 9016A are connected, they are stored in the ROM 90121 or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. It may be controlled so that the checksum calculation itself using the effect data is not executed and the calculation result or the like is not displayed accordingly. Further, in step S9054 shown in FIG. 58, it may be determined whether or not the relay non-connection flag is on, and if it is determined that the relay not connected flag is on, the memory inspection process of step S9055 may be executed. In this case, it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 61 (A) whether or not there is a connection with the main board 9011, and if it is determined that there is no connection, the checksum calculation result and the like are obtained in step S90206. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a connection, the checksum calculation result or the like may be controlled not to be displayed by not executing the process of step S90206. As described above, when either one of the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the checksum calculation result is not executed by executing the checksum calculation process itself. It may be controlled not to display such as, or it may be controlled so that the checksum calculation result is not displayed although the process of calculating the checksum is executed.

Alternatively, even when either one of the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the checksum calculation result and the like can be displayed, while the display mode is The display mode may be difficult to recognize as compared with the display mode in which both the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected. For example, when displaying the checksum calculation result by displaying an image on the screen of the main image display device 905MA or the sub image display device 905SU, the display size of the image should be reduced, the transparency of the image should be increased, and the image should be displayed. It suffices if the display period can be shortened, the number of times the image is displayed can be reduced, or a part or all of these can be combined to display the checksum calculation result in a display mode that is difficult to recognize. As described above, either the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, or either one of the main board 9011 and the effect control relay board 9016A and the effect control board 9012 are connected. By defining the range of the connected state, which is the unconnected state, and by setting the display limit of not displaying the checksum calculation result, or by setting the display limit of displaying in a display mode that is difficult to recognize. Any display may be restricted according to the connection status.

In the above embodiment, the main board 9011 is indirectly connected to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015, while the effect control relay board 9016A is directly connected to the effect control board 9016A via the harness HN1 (via another board). It has been described as being connected to the effect control board 9012 (without). On the other hand, for a plurality of boards indirectly connected to the effect control board 9012 via another board such as the effect control relay board 9016A, such as the drive control board 9016B, all of them and the effect control board 9012 Checksum calculation results, etc. can be displayed when and is not connected, and checksum calculation results, etc. are not displayed when some of them and the effect control board 9012 are not connected. It may be controlled to. Alternatively, for a plurality of boards that can be directly connected to the effect control board 9012, when all of them and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, the checksum calculation result and the like can be displayed, and one of them can be displayed. When the unit and the effect control board 9012 are not connected, control may be performed so as not to display the checksum calculation result or the like.

In the above embodiment, as a determination process for determining whether or not the effect data stored in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is normal, in step S90204 in the memory inspection process as shown in FIG. 61 (A). The checksum is calculated and the result of the checksum can be displayed. On the other hand, the data determination method is not limited to the checksum calculation, and any determination method can be adopted. The checksum calculation is not limited to the one that calculates the exclusive OR for each data at address 1, and may be the one that calculates the exclusive OR or the like with the data at multiple addresses as the calculation unit.

In the above embodiment, the checksum of the stored data is calculated for all of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the calculation result and the like can be displayed. On the other hand, the checksum of the stored data may be calculated for a part of the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C, and the calculation result or the like may be displayed. Whether or not the checksum is to be calculated may be different depending on the stored contents in the ROM 90121 and the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C. For example, the effect control program and various management data stored in the first storage area of the ROM 90121 and the image data stored in the effect data memories 90123A and 90123B are set as checksum calculation targets, and the calculation results and the like are used. On the other hand, the audio data stored in the second storage area of the ROM 90121, the audio data other than the image data stored in the effect data memory 90123A, the motor data and the light emission data stored in the effect data memory 90123C can be displayed. , The check sum may not be calculated and the calculation result may not be displayed. The setting of which stored data is used to calculate the checksum may be different depending on the condition in which the predetermined calculation condition is satisfied. For example, when the power is turned on while the push button 9031B is pressed, the checksum can be calculated using the stored data of the ROM 90121 and the calculation result can be displayed, while the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C can be displayed. The checksum calculation using the stored data of is not performed.

In the above embodiment, whether or not the stored data is normal for a storage device such as ROM 90121 or effect data memories 90123A to 90123C that is mounted on the effect control board 9012 and can store the effect data used for executing the effect. It has been described as making it possible to display the judgment result of. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for a storage device capable of storing control data used for arbitrary control in the pachinko gaming machine 901, it is possible to display a determination result of whether or not the stored data is normal. You may. For example, whether or not the stored data of the ROM 90101 mounted on the main board 9011 and capable of storing the control data (including the binary code constituting the program module) used for controlling the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is normal. It may be possible to display the determination result. In this case, among a plurality of boards that can be connected to the main board 9011 such as a payout control board and an information terminal board, those to be the second board and the third board may be set in advance. Then, when both the second board and the second board and the main board 9011 are not connected, the determination result of the stored data such as the checksum calculation result using the stored data of the ROM 90101 is displayed on the main image display device 905MA. It is possible to display on a display device such as, and control so that the judgment result of the stored data is not displayed when either one of the second board and the third board and the main board 9011 is not connected. May be good. Further, the storage data of the non-volatile recording medium such as ROM 90121 or the effect data memories 90123A to 90123C is not limited to the one for determining whether or not the storage data is normal, and the volatile recording medium such as RAM 90122 or work memory 90131 is used. It may be possible to determine whether or not the stored data is normal and display the determination result.

In the above embodiment, the checksum calculation result that is the determination result of the storage data is obtained according to the connection state between a plurality of boards such as the connection state between the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. It was explained as different whether or not to display such as. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to display the determination result of the stored data differs depending on, for example, the connection state in an arbitrary circuit, device, or other element provided inside or outside the single substrate. It may be a thing. That is, in a configuration in which a second connection portion and a third connection portion that can be connected to the first connection portion are provided, both the second connection portion and the third connection portion and the first connection portion are not connected. The judgment result by the judgment processing using the stored data can be displayed, and the stored data is used when either one of the second connection part and the third connection part and the first connection part are not connected. It may be controlled so as not to display the determination result by the determination process. The display is not limited to the display of the judgment result by the judgment processing using the stored data, and in the configuration in which the second connection part and the third connection part that can be connected to the first connection part are provided, the second connection part and the third connection part are provided. When both of the above and the first connection part are not connected, it is possible to output an arbitrary processing result using arbitrary data, and either one of the second connection part and the third connection part and the first connection part can be output. It may be controlled so as not to output an arbitrary processing result using arbitrary data when and is not connected.

In addition, various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the configuration for confirming the connection state uses the voltage at the connection confirmation terminals such as the terminals TM22 and TN22 shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B), or determines the presence / absence of command reception. The connection state may be arbitrarily confirmed mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically by using, for example, a switch or a sensor.

In the above embodiment, in the process of step S90102 shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is set to the special gaming state such as the probabilistic state, and based on the determination to set the probabilistic state. It was explained that the probability variation control condition is satisfied and the probability variation state is controlled after the end of the big hit game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the fact that the game ball that has won (entered) the big winning opening (second big winning opening) is detected by the probabilistic change detection switch in the probabilistic attacker provided at a predetermined position in the game area. The probabilistic control condition may be satisfied, and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be controlled to the probabilistic state. The big winning opening (second big winning opening) of the probabilistic attacker can change from the closed state to the open state when the number of executions of the round game in the big hit game state is a predetermined number of times (for example, "16"), and the round When the number of times the game is executed is other than the predetermined number of times, the game may remain closed and cannot be changed to the open state. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 901 can establish the probability variation control condition based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the specific region in the attacker, which is an example of the special variable winning device provided in the gaming area. It may be configured to be.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 may not perform variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol. As an example, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed (entered) the starting winning opening provided in the game area, the variable winning device provided in the game area is opened from the closed state (second state) (second state). When the game ball that has changed to the first state) and entered the inside of the variable winning device enters a specific area (V winning opening) among a plurality of areas, it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It may be one. In such a pachinko gaming machine 901, is it possible to execute the abnormality notification of the movable member by executing the effect control main process as shown in FIG. 58 and the memory inspection process as shown in FIG. 61 (A)? It may be configured so that at least one of the control of whether or not and the control of whether or not the checksum calculation result can be displayed can be realized.

The above embodiment can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 901 but also to slot machines and the like. A slot machine is an arbitrary game machine capable of performing a predetermined game such as a variable display of a symbol serving as a plurality of types of identification information and imparting a predetermined game value based on the game result, and more specifically, the slot machine. 1. A variable display device that can start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets (number of medals or credits) for one game and variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified by each. One game ends when the display result of (for example, multiple reels, etc.) is derived and displayed, and a prize (for example, cherry prize, watermelon prize, bell prize, replay prize, BB prize, RB prize, etc.) is awarded according to the display result. ) Is a game machine that can be generated. In such a slot machine, the features of the pachinko gaming machine 901 shown in the above embodiment by the cooperation of the hardware resources including the image display device of the slot machine and the software that performs a predetermined process. It suffices if it is configured to include all or part of. That is, whether or not the slot machine can execute the abnormality notification of the movable member by executing the effect control main process as shown in FIG. 58 and the memory inspection process as shown in FIG. 61 (A). It may be configured so that at least one of the control and the control of whether or not the checksum calculation result can be displayed can be realized.

In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the game machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device, the audio output operation in the speaker, and the top frame LED 909a, the left frame LED 909b, the right frame LED 909c, and the decorative LED. Various production operations including the lighting operation can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the game machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type game machine in which a predetermined number of game media are paid out as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, and a score is scored based on the occurrence of a prize by enclosing the game medium. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that grants.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in the gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 901 or a slot machine. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in a storage device such as a computer device in advance. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

As described above, in the above-described embodiment, for example, when it is determined in step S9057 shown in FIG. 58 that the relay non-connection flag is on, the origin abnormality is not notified in step S9060. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S9057 that the relay non-connection flag is off, it is possible to execute the notification of the origin abnormality in step S9060. In this way, when the first board such as the effect control board 9012 and the second board such as the effect control relay board 9016A are not connected, the movable member is controlled so as not to be notified of the abnormality. , It is possible to prevent frequent abnormality notifications in the manufacturing stage and the development stage, and improve work efficiency.

The connectors CN01 and CN11 shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B) include terminals TM22 and TN22, which are connection confirmation terminals, respectively, and in step S9052 and the like shown in FIG. 58, based on the voltage at these connection confirmation terminals. Check the connection status. As a result, the connection status can be confirmed with a simple configuration.

In the above embodiment, for example, in step S9054 shown in FIG. 58, it is determined that there is no connection with the main board 9011, and in step S90205 shown in FIG. 61 (A), it is determined that the relay unconnected flag is on. In addition, the update display in step S90206 is controlled to display the checksum calculation content and the like. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S9054 that there is a connection with the main board 9011, or when it is determined in step S90205 shown in FIG. 61 (A) that the relay non-connection flag is off, step S90206 It is controlled so that the update display of is not performed and the checksum calculation contents are not displayed. In this way, in the configuration including the first substrate such as the effect control board 9012 and the second and third boards such as the effect control relay board 9016A and the main board 9011, either the second board or the third board is provided. When one of the first board and the first board are not connected, the output for inspection can be appropriately suppressed by controlling so that the determination result by the determination process such as the checksum calculation result is not displayed. As a result, for example, when installed in a game store, one of the second board and the third board and the first board are accidentally disconnected (temporary cable disconnection) and the power is turned on. In the situation, the occurrence of misidentification of failure on the amusement store side can be suppressed by not displaying the determination result by the determination process such as the checksum calculation result.

Further, for example, the ROM 90121 as shown in FIG. 41 (A) stores audio data used for audio control, and the effect data memory 90123A as shown in FIG. 41 (B1) stores image data used for display control and the like. The audio data is also stored in the storage area corresponding to the specific address range of the effect data memory 90123A which is continuous from the final address of the ROM 90121. In this way, by storing the first control data such as voice data in the area corresponding to the specific address range of the second area continuous from the final address of the first area, the storage area can be effectively utilized to reduce the manufacturing cost. While reducing the number, the control data can be smoothly read out and appropriate control can be performed.

Further, in the above embodiment, "different ratios" are not limited to those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. It is a concept that includes those having different ratios due to the relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one having 100% allocation and the other having 0% allocation).

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 5HL 1st hold display 5HR 2nd hold display 6A Normal winning ball device 6B Normal variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning Ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9 Game effect lamp 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Voice control board 14 Lamp control board 15 Relay board 20 Ordinary symbol display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start port switch 23 Count switch 100 Micro for game control Computer 101, 121 ROM
102, 122 RAM
103 CPU
104, 124 Random number circuit 105, 125 I / O
120 Production control CPU
123 Display control unit AHA Active display area AHW Active display frame H1 to H4 Hold display 901 Pachinko game machine 905MA Main image display device 905SU Sub image display device 908L, 908R Speaker 909a Top frame LED
909b Left frame LED
909c right frame LED
9011 Main board 9012 Production control board 9016A Relay board for production control 9016B Drive control board 9016C to 9016F Light emitter control board 9051 to 9054 Movable member 9060A to 9060C Operation motor 9061 Movable member position sensor 9071 to 9074 Light emitter unit 90120 Microcomputer 90121 ROM
90123A to 90123C Production data memory 90130 CPU
90140 VDP
90411, 90413a to 90413c Luminescent driver 90412 Motor drive driver CN01, CN11 connector TM01 to TM24, TN01 to TN24 terminal

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
It is equipped with a corresponding display means that can display a corresponding display corresponding to a variable display by any of multiple display modes having different expectations.
The corresponding display means
Hold display means that can display hold display corresponding to variable display before execution as corresponding display,
Including an active display means capable of displaying an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed as a corresponding display,
A specific notice effect execution means for executing a specific notice effect that continuously announces that the corresponding display will change to a display mode at a higher expectation stage by a specific display different from the corresponding display for a predetermined period.
Further provided with a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the hold display may change to a display mode at a higher expectation stage.
There are multiple types of the specific display.
The specific advance notice effect executing means can execute the specific advance notice effect by a plurality of the specific displays.
The degree of expectation of the specific notice effect differs depending on the type of the specific display and the number of the specific displays.
When the specific advance notice effect is executed, the suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the specific advance notice effect is not executed, and the specific advance notice effect is not executed. Sometimes the above-mentioned suggestion effect can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that, after the execution of the specific advance notice effect, the specific display acts on the corresponding display, so that the corresponding display changes to a stage with a higher degree of expectation.